Service Manual: Published in May 2014 3P2SM062 Rev.2

DP-772
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in May 2014
3P2SM062
Rev.2
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE

OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your
local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE

DE TYPE INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES
INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les
fonctionnaires municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides
et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Revision history
Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks
1 28 March 2014 Contents,1-1-1,1-2-2,Installation guide, Address -
2 15 May 2014 Installation guide -
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.

1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
3P2
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-2
1-1-3 Machine cross section ........................................................................................................... 1-1-3
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment......................................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-2-2 Unpacking.............................................................................................................................. 1-2-2
(1) Unpacking......................................................................................................................... 1-2-2
(2) Remove the tapes and pad .............................................................................................. 1-2-3
1-3 Maintenance Mode

1-3-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................ 1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ......................................................................................... 1-3-1
(2) Maintenance mode item list.............................................................................................. 1-3-2
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items .............................................................................. 1-3-3
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Original misfeed detection ..................................................................................................... 1-4-1
(1) Original misfeed indication ............................................................................................... 1-4-1
(2) Original misfeed detection conditions............................................................................... 1-4-1
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis ........................................................................................................................ 1-4-3
(1) Self-diagnostic function .................................................................................................... 1-4-3
(2) Self diagnostic codes........................................................................................................ 1-4-3
1-4-3 Electrical problems ................................................................................................................ 1-4-5
1-4-4 Mechanical problems............................................................................................................. 1-4-8
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly

1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly........................................................................... 1-5-1
(1) Precautions....................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
1-5-2 Assembly and disassembly ................................................................................................... 1-5-2
(1) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley ..................... 1-5-2
(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley ............................................................. 1-5-6
(3) Detaching and refitting the CIS......................................................................................... 1-5-7
1-5-3 Image adjustment ................................................................................................................ 1-5-10
(1) Adjusting the angle of leading edge ............................................................................... 1-5-10
(2) Adjusting the angle of trailing edge ................................................................................ 1-5-12
1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement

1-6-1 Remarks on DP main PWB replacement............................................................................... 1-6-1
(1) DP main PWB................................................................................................................... 1-6-1
(2) DP SHD PWB................................................................................................................... 1-6-1
2-1 Mechanical Construction

2-1-1 Original feed section .............................................................................................................. 2-1-1
2-1-2 Original conveying section..................................................................................................... 2-1-3
3P2-1
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ............................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(1) PWBs................................................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(2) Switches and sensors....................................................................................................... 2-2-2
(3) Motors............................................................................................................................... 2-2-3
2-3 Operation of the PWBs

2-3-1 DP main PWB........................................................................................................................ 2-3-1
2-3-2 DP SHD PWB ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-6
2-4 Appendixes
2-4-1 Appendixes ............................................................................................................................ 2-4-1
(1) List of maintenance parts ................................................................................................. 2-4-1
(2) Periodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................... 2-4-2
(3) Wiring diagram ................................................................................................................. 2-4-4
INSTALLATION GUIDE
DOCUMENT PROCESSOR
3P2-1
1-1-1 Specifications
1-1 Specifications
Item Specifications
Original feed method Automatic feed
Supported original types Sheet originals
Maximum: A3/ Ledger
Original sizes
Minimum : A6-R/ Statement-R
Simplex: 35 to 220 g/m2
Original weights
Duplex : 50 to 220 g/m2
175 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) or less
Loading capacity
When originals have different widths:30sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Power source Electrically connected to the machine.
600 × 513 × 170 mm
Dimensions (W × D × H)
23 5/8 × 20 3/16 × 6 11/16”
Weight 14.5 kg/32 lb or less
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-1-1
3P2
1-1-2 Parts names
2
6
2
1
3
4
Figure 1-1-1
1. Original tray 4. Original stopper

2. Original width guides 5. DP top cover
3. Original eject table 6. Cleaning cloth compartment
1-1-2
3P2
1-1-3 Machine cross section
2 1
3 Original path
Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section
1. Original feed section

2. Original conveying section
3. Original switchback/eject section
1-1-3
3P2
1-1-4
3P2
1-2-1 Installation environment

1-2 Installation
Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.)

Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or
other strong light when removing paper jams.
Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity; an abrupt
change in the environmental temperature; and cool or hot, direct air.
Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations.
Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°).
Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as
mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
Select a well-ventilated location.
1-2-1
3P2-1
1-2-2 Unpacking
(1) Unpacking
20 26
25
16
21 22 27
23 24 7 9
28
8
29
30
17 18 19 10 31
11
12
1
13
14 5 6
15
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking

1. Document processor 10. Cleaning cloth 18. Fixing fitting 26. DP relay PWB
2. Plastic sheet 11. Plastic bag (38.5mm) 27. Plastic bag
3. Inner frame 12. Installation guide 19. Fixing fitting (45mm) 28. Right hinge cover
4. Outer case 13. Plastic bag 20. Plastic bag 29. Left hinge cover
5. Front bottom pad 14. Original mat 21. Pin 30. DP cable cover 1
6. Rear bottom pad 15. Original mat holder 22. M4 x 14 TP screws 31. DP cable cover 2
7. Front left top pad 16. Air-padded bag 23. M3 x 8 black screw
8. Front right top pad 17. Angle control fitting 24. M3 x 8 screws
9. Rear top pad 25. Air-padded bag
Caution: See the Installation Guide for installation.
1-2-2
3P2
(2) Remove the tapes and pad
Procedure
1. Remove four tapes. Protective sheet Tape
Tapes
Tape
Figure 1-2-2
2. Open the DP top cover and original DP top cover

width guides.
Original width guide
3. Remove the pad.
Pad
Original width guide
Figure 1-2-3
1-2-3
3P2
1-2-4
3P2
1-3-1 Maintenance mode

1-3 Maintenance Mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the
machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the cursor up/down keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the cursor
up/down keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
1-3-1
3P2
(2) Maintenance mode item list

Item
Section Content of maintenance item Initial setting
No.
General U000 Outputting an own-status report -
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode -
Optical U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp -
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP 0/0
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification 0/0/0
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0/0/0/0
U072 Adjusting the DP center line 0/0/0
U073 Checking the scanner operation -
U074 DP input response adjustment 1
U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation 125/125/125
U091 Setting the white line correction 112/112/112/75/0
U099 Adjusting original size detection DP is not installed
20/30/40/20/30/40/20/30/40
DP is installed
50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50
Operation U203 Checking DP operation -
panel and U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors -
support
equipment U244 Checking the DP switches -
Mode setting U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication On/8
Image U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0/
processing 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0
U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically -
U425 Setting the target -
Other U905 Checking counts by optional devices -
U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP 0/0/0
U990 Checking the time for the exposure lamp to light -
1-3-2
3P2
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items

Item No. Description
U000 Outputting an own-status report
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call
occurrences. Outputs the event log or service status page. Also sends output data to the USB
memory.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the mainte-
nance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be output using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Output list
Maintenance List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
User Status Outputs the user status page
Service Status Outputs the service status page
Event Outputs the event log
Network Status Outputs the network status page
All Outputs the all reports
3. Press the start key. A list is output.

4. Press the start key. The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/Letter paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed
location.
The output status is displayed.
Display Description
Ready List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
Active Outputs the user status page
Complete Outputs the service status page
Error Outputs the event log
1-3-3
3P2

U000 Method: Send to the USB memory
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has
gone off, switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter the maintenance item.
6. Select the item to be send.
7. Select [Text] or [HTML].
Display Output list
Print Outputs the report
USB (Text) Sends output data to the USB memory (text type)
USB (HTML) Sends output data to the USB memory (HTML type)

Output will be sent to the USB memory.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-4
3P2

U000 Event log
Event Log
MFP (2) 27/Oct/2010 08:40
(3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Firmware version 2LC_2000.000.000 2010.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(8) Paper Jam Log (12) Counter Log

# Count. Event Descriprions
16 9999999 0501.01.08.01.01
(f) J0000: 0 J0041: 1 (g) C0000: 0 (h) T00: 10
J0001: 1 J0042: 1 C0001: 1 T01: 20
15 8888888 4002.01.08.01.01
J0002: 11 J0043: 1 C0002: 2 T02: 30
14 7777777 0501.01.08.01.01
J0003: 222 J0044: 1 C0003: 3 T03: 40
13 6666666 4002.01.08.01.01
J0004: 1 J0045: 1 C0004: 4 T04: 50
12 5555555 0501.01.08.01.01
J0005: 1 J0046: 1 C0005: 5 T05: 999
11 4444444 4002.01.08.01.01
J0006: 1 J0047: 1 C0006: 6
10 3333333 0501.01.08.01.01
J0007: 1 J0048: 1 C0007: 7
9 2222222 4002.01.08.01.01
J0008: 1 J0049: 1 C0008: 8
8 1111111 0501.01.08.01.01
J0009: 1 J0050: 1 C0009: 9
7 999999 4002.01.08.01.01
J0010: 1 C0010: 10
6 888888 0501.01.08.01.01
J0012: 999 C0011: 11
5
4 0501.01.08.01.01
777777
666666
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
J0013: 1 C0012: 12
J0014: 1 C0013: 13
3 555555 (a) (b) (c) (d)
4002.01.08.01.01 (e)
J0015: 1 C0014: 14
2 444444 0501.01.08.01.01
J0016: 1 C0015: 15
1 1 4002.01.08.01.01
J0017: 1 C0016: 16
J0018: 1 C0017: 17
(9) Service Call Log J0019: 1 C0018: 18
# Count. Service Code J0020: 1 C0019: 19
8 1111111 01.6000 J0021: 1 C0020: 20
7 999999 01.2100 J0022: 1 C0021: 21
6 888888 01.4000 J0023: 1 C0022: 22
5 777777 01.6000 J0024: 1 C0023: 23
4 666666 01.2100 J0025: 1
3 555555 01.4000 J0026: 1
2 444444 01.6000 J0027: 1
1 1 01.2100 J0028: 1
J0029: 1
(10) Maintenance Log J0030: 1
# Count. Item J0031: 1
J0032: 1
Log Data Nothing... J0033: 1
J0034: 1
J0035: 1
(11) Unknown toner Log
J0036: 1
# Count. Item
J0037: 1
5 1111111 01.00
J0038: 1
4 999999 01.00
J0039: 1
3 888888 01.00
J0040: 1
2 777777 01.00
1 666666 01.00
(7) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Figure 1-3-1
Detail of event log

No. Items Description
(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine soft version
(4) Engine boot version
1-3-5
3P2

U000 Detail of event log
(5) Controller BROM version
(6) Operation panel mask version
(7) Machine serial number
(8) Paper Jam # Count. Event
Log
Remembers 1 to 16 of The total page count Log code (hexadeci-
occurrence. If the occur- at the time of the mal, 5 categories)
rence of the previous paper jam.
paper jam is less than (a) Cause of a paper
16, all of the paper jams jam
are logged. When the (b) Paper source
occurrence excesseds (c) Paper size
16, the oldest occur- (d) Paper type
rence is removed. (e) Paper eject
(a) Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
Refer to P.1-4-1 for paper jam location
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)

00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2
03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
04: Cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
05: Cassette 5 (side feeder/SMT paper feeder)
06: Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
07: Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
08 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)

00: (Not specified) 0B: B4 22: Special 1
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 25: Ledger wide
04: International C5 0F: B6 26: Full bleed paper
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 (12 x 8)
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 27: 8K
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 28: 16K-R
07: Legal 13: Custom size A8: 16K-E
08: A4R 1E: C4 32: Statement-R
88: A4E 1F: Postcard B2: Statement-E
09: B5R 20: Reply-paid post- 33: Folio
89: B5E card 34: Western type 2
0A: A3 21: Oficio II 35: Western type 4
1-3-6
3P2

U000
(8) Paper Jam (d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
cont. Log
01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
02: Transparency 0B: Pre punched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
(e) Detail of paper eject location (Hexadecimal)
01: Face down (FD)
02: Face up (FU)/1000-sheet finisher face up (FU)/
4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FU)
03: 1000-sheet finisher face down (FD)
4000-sheet finisher main tray (FD)
05: Job separator tray
06: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FU)
07: 4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FD)
09: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FD)
0A: Center-folding unit tray
0B: Mailbox tray 1 (FD)
0C: Mailbox tray 1 (FU)
0F: 100-sheets Inner Job separator tray (FD)
15: Mailbox tray 2 (FD)
16: Mailbox tray 2 (FU)
1F: Mailbox tray 3 (FD)
2A: Mailbox tray 4 (FU)
3D: Mailbox tray 6 (FD)
3E: Mailbox tray 6 (FU)
04/0D/0E: Reserved
1-3-7
3P2

U000
(9) Service Call # Count. Service Code
Log
Remembers 1 to 8 The total page Self diagnostic error code
of occurrence of self count at the time of (See page 1-4-3)
diagnostics error. If the self diagnostics
the occurrence of error. Example:
the previous diag- 01.6000
nostics error is less
than 8, all of the 01: Self diagnostic error
diagnostics errors 6000: Self diagnostic error
are logged. code number
(10) Maintenance # Count. Item

Log
Remembers 1 to 8 The total page Code of maintenance
of occurrence of count at the time of replacing item
replacement. If the the replacement of (1 byte, 2 categories)
occurrence of the the toner container.
previous replace- First byte (Replacing item)
ment of toner con- 01: Toner container
tainer is less than 8, Second byte
all of the occur- (Type of replacing item)
rences of replace- 00: Black
ment are logged. 01: Cyan
02: Magenta
03: Yellow
First byte (Replacing item)

02: Maintenance kit
Second byte
(Type of replacing item)
01: MK-8305A/8505A
02: MK-8305B/8505B
03: MK-8305C/8505C
(11) Unknown # Count. Item

Toner Log
Remembers 1 to 5 The total page Unknown toner log code
of occurrence of count at the time of (1 byte, 2 categories)
unknown toner the toner empty
detection. If the error with using an First byte
occurrence of the unknown toner 01: Toner container (Fixed)
previous unknown container. Second byte
toner detection is 00: Black
less than 5, all of the 01: Cyan
unknown toner 02: Magenta
detection are 03: Yellow
logged.
1-3-8
3P2

U000
(12) Counter Log (f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic (h) Maintenance item
error replacing
Comprised of
Indicates the log Indicates the log Indicates the log coun-
three log coun- counter of paper counter of self diag- ter depending on the
ters including jams depending on nostics errors maintenance item for
paper jams, self
location. depending on maintenance.
diagnostics cause.
errors, and Refer to Paper Jam (See page 1-3-5) T: Toner container
replacement of
Log. 00: Black
the toner con- Example: 01: Cyan
tainer. All instances includ- C6000: 4 02: Magenta
ing those are not 03: Yellow
occurred are dis- Self diagnostics M: Maintenance kit
played. error 6000 has hap- 01: MK-8305A/8505A
pened four times. 02: MK-8305B/8505B
03: MK-8305C/8505C
Example:
T00: 1
The toner container has
been replaced once.
1-3-9
3P2

U000 Service status page (1)
Service Status Page

MFP (2) 27/10/2010 12:00
(3) (4) (5)
(1) Firmware version 2LC_2000.000.000 2010.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Controller Information (30) FAX Information Slot1/Slot2

(31) Rings (Normal) 3
Memory status
(32) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3
(7) Total Size 2.0 GB
(33) Rings (TAD) 3
(34) Option DIMM Size 16 MB
Time
(8) Local Time Zone +01:00 Amsterdam
(9) Date and Time 27/10/2010 12:00 (35) FRPO Status
(10) Time Server 10.183.53.13 Default Pattern Switch B8 0
Default Font Number C5*1000+C2*100+C3 00000
Installed Options .
(11) Document Processor Installed .
(12) Paper feeder Cassette (500 x 2) .
(13) Side Feeder Cassette (3000) .
(14) Finisher 1000-Finisher .
(15) Job Separator Installed .
(16) Document Guaed (A) Installed .
(17) Card Authentication Kit (B) Installed .
(18) Internet FAX Kit (A) Installed .
Security Kit (E) Installed .
(19) Data Security Kit (E) Software Type I .
(20) UG-34 Installed .
(21) USB Keyboard Connected .
(22) USB Keyboard Type US-English .
.
Print Coverage .
(23) Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) .
(24) Total .
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 .
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22 .
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33 .
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44 .
(25) Copy
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 e-MPS error control Y6 0
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44 RP Code
(26) Printer (36) 1234 5678 9012
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 (37) 5678 9012 3456
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22 (38) 9012 3456 7890
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33 (39) 3456 7890 1234
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44
(27) FAX
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(28) Period (27/10/2010 - 03/11/2010 08:40)
(29) Last Page K/C/M/Y(%) 1.00 / 2.22 / 3.33 / 4.44
1 (6) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Figure 1-3-2
1-3-10
3P2

U000 Service status page (2)
Service Status Page

MFP 27/10/2010 12:00
Firmware version 2LC_2000.000.000 2010.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Engine Information Send Information

(40) NVRAM Version _1F31225_1F31225 (44) Date and Time 10/10/27
(41) Scanner Version 2LC_1200.001.089 (45) Address
(42) FAX Slot1
FAX BOOT Version 5JT_5000.001.001
FAX APL Version 5JT_5100.001.001
FAX IPL Version 5JT_5200.001.001
(43) MAC Address 00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D
1/2 (46) (47)

(48) 100/100
(49) 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
(50) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/0/0/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64)
(65) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
(66) 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
00000000000000000000000000000000/0000000000000000000000000000000000000000/000000/ (67) (68) (69)
(70) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(71) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(72) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(73) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(74) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(75) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(76) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
(77) XXXXXXXX
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (78) (79)
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (80) (81)
(82) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00
0/3/ (83) (84)
0/12.3/56.7/ (85) (86) (87)
1/1/1/0/1/0 2010/12/15 12:34:56 (88)
1/5/ (89)(90)
ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ (91)
2 [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Figure 1-3-3
1-3-11
3P2

U000 Detail of service status page
No. Description Supplement
(1) Firmware version -
(2) System date -
(3) Engine soft version -
(4) Engine boot version -
(5) Operation panel mask version -
(6) Machine serial number -
(7) Total memory size -
(8) Local time zone -
(9) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour:minute
(10) NTP server name -
(11) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not installed
document processor
(12) Presence or absence of the Paper feeder/Large capacity feeder/Not Installed
paper feeder
(13) Presence or absence of the side Side deck/Side multi tray/Side paper feeder/
feeder Side large capacity feeder/Not Installed
(14) Presence or absence of the 1000-sheet finisher/4000-sheet finisher/
finisher Not Installed
(15) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
job separator
printed document guard kit
(17) Presence or absence of the IC Installed/Not Installed/Trial
card authentication kit
internet fax kit
data security kit
UG-34
(21) Presence or absence of the Connected/Not connected
USB keyboard
(22) USB keyboard setting display US-English/US-English with Euro/German/French
(23) Page of relation to the A4/Letter -
(24) Average coverage for total Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(25) Average coverage for copy Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(26) Average coverage for printer Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(27) Average coverage for fax Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
1-3-12
3P2

U000
(28) Cleared date and output date -
(29) Coverage on the final output -
page
(30) Fax kit information This item is printed only when the fax kit is
installed.
(31) Number of rings 0 to 15
(32) Number of rings before auto- 0 to 15
matic switching
(33) Number of rings before connect- 0 to 15
ing to answering machine
(34) Optional DIMM size -
(35) FRPO setting -
(36) RP code Code the engine software version and the date of
update.
(37) RP code Code the main software version and the date of
update.
(38) RP code Code the engine software version and the date of
the previous update.
(39) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the
previous update.
(40) NV RAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
(a) Consistency of the present software version

and the database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version
and the ME firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME database ver-
sion
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and
(e) are identical with (c) and (f).
(41) Scanner firmware version -
(42) Fax firmware version This item is printed only when the fax kit is
installed.
(43) Mac address -
1-3-13
3P2

U000
(44) The last sent date and time -
(45) Transmission address -
(46) Destination information -
(47) Area information -
(48) Margin settings Top margin/Left margin
(49) Margin/Page length/Page width Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/
settings Left margin integer part/Left margin decimal part/
Page length integer part/Page length decimal part/
Page width integer part/Page width decimal part
Life counter (The first line) Machine life/MP tray/Cassette 1/Cassette 2/
Cassette 3/Cassette 4/Cassette 5/Cassette 6/
Cassette 7/Duplex
(50) Life counter (The second line) Drum unit K/Drum unit C/Drum unit M/Drum unit Y/
Transfer belt unit/Developer unit K/
Developer unit C/Developer unit M/
Developer unit Y/Maintenance kit A/
Maintenance kit B/Maintenance kit C
(51) Panel lock information 0: Off/1: Partial lock/2: Full lock
(52) USB information U00: Not installed/U01: Full speed/U02: Hi speed
(53) Paper handling information 0: Paper source unit select/1: Paper source unit
(54) Color printing double count 0: All single counts
mode 1: A3, Single count, Less than 420 mm (length)
2: Legal, Single count, 356 mm or less (length)
3: Folio, Single count, Less than 330 mm (length)
(55) Black and white printing double 0: All single counts
count mode 1: A3, Single count, Less than 420 mm (length)
2: Legal, Single count, 356 mm or less (length)
3: Folio, Single count, Less than 330 mm (length)
(56) Billing counting timing -
(57) Temperature (machine inside) -
(58) Temperature (machine outside) -
(59) Relative humidity -
(machine outside)
(60) Humidity (machine inside) -
(61) Fixed assets number -
(62) Job end judgment time-out time -
(63) Job end detection mode -
(64) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off
1: On
1-3-14
3P2

(65) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings
1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High
1: Normal 1 1: Middle
2: Normal 2 2: Low
3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
4: Heavy 1 Duplex settings
5: Heavy 2 0: Disable
6: Heavy 3 1: Enable
7: Extra Heavy
(66) Calibration information Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(67) Calibration information -
(76) RFID information -
(77) RFID reader/writer version infor- -
mation
(78) Color table version for printer -
(79) Color table 2 version for printer -
(80) Color table version for copy -
(81) Color table 2 version for copy -
(82) Maintenance information -
(83) Altitude 0: Standard
1: High altitude 1
2: High altitude 2
(84) Charger roller correction 1 to 5
(85) Configuring toner coverage 0: Full-color count display
counters 1: Color coverage count display
(86) Low coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(87) Middle coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(88) Data Sanitization information -
(89) Toner low setting 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1-3-15
3P2

U000
(90) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)
(91) Drum serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
Code conversion
A B C D E F G H I J
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Completion
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode
Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
1. Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp
Description
Lights the exposure lamp.
Purpose
To check whether the exposure lamp are turned on.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
CCD The exposure lamp lights
CIS The CIS lights (when dual scan DP is installed)
3. Press the start key. The lamp lights.
4. To turn the lamp off, press the stop key.
Completion
1-3-16
3P2

U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP
Description
Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Performs the test copy at the four scan-
ning positions after adjusting.
Purpose
Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is
used. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Setting
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
DP Read Starting position adjustment for -38 to 38 0 0.158 mm
scanning originals
Black Line Scanning position for the test 0 to 3 0 -
copy originals
2. Select [DP Read].
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
When the setting value is increased, the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to
the left when the setting value is decreased.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
5. Select [Black Line].
6. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
8. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the DP and press the system menu key.
9. Press the start key. Test copy is executed.
10. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check
that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion
1-3-17
3P2

U070 Adjusting the DP magnification
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning speed.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the
DP is used.
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction when the CIS
is used.
Adjustment
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Display Description
Sub Scan(F) Magnification in the auxiliary -125 to 125 0 0.02 %
scanning direction of CCD
(first side)
Main Magnification in the main scan- -100 to 100 0 0.02 %
Scan(CIS) ning direction of CIS
Sub Magnification in the auxiliary -125 to 125 0 0.02 %
Scan(CIS) scanning direction of CIS
Adjustment: [Sub Scan]

1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value makes the image longer, while decreasing the value makes the image
shorter.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-4
1-3-18
3P2

U070 Adjustment: [Main Scan]
Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-5
Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following
adjustments in maintenance mode.
U039 U070
Completion
1-3-19
3P2

U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the origi-
nal and the copy image when the DP is used.
Method

Display Description
Front Head Leading edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD (first side)
Front Tail Trailing edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD (first side)
CIS Head Leading edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD
CIS Tail Trailing edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD
1-3-20
3P2

U071 Adjustment: Leading edge registration
Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image
backward.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-6
Caution
If the first side is adjusted, check the second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following
adjustments in maintenance mode.
U039 U034 U071
Adjustment: Trailing edge registration

Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-7
Caution
adjustment.
Completion
1-3-21
3P2

U072 Adjusting the DP center line
Description
Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy
image when the DP is used.
Adjustment
Display Description
Front DP center line (first side) -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
CIS CIS center line -39 to 39 0 0.085 mm
Increasing the value moves the image rightward and decreasing it moves the image leftward.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-8
Caution
adjustment.
If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line, proceed with the following mainte-
nance modes.
U034 U065 U067 U072
Completion
1-3-22
3P2

U073 Checking the scanner operation
Description
Simulates the scanner operation under the arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check the scanner operation. This is also done to check the accumulation of dust on the slit
glass.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated.
Display Description
Scanner Motor Scanner operation
Home Position Home position operation
Dust Check Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on
DP Reading DP scanning position operation
Setting: [Scanner Motor]

1. Select [Scanner Motor].
2. Select the item.
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys.
Display Operating conditions Setting range
Zoom Magnification 25 to 400 %
Size Original size See below.
Lamp On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on)
Original sizes for each setting in SIZE
Setting Paper size Setting Paper size
5000 A4 5000 A5R
4300 B5 7800 Folio
5100 11" x 8 1/2" 10200 11" x 17"
10000 A3 9000 11" x 15"
8600 B4 8400 8 1/2" x 14"
7100 A4R 6600 8 1/2" x 11"
6100 B5R 5100 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
4. Press the start key. The setting is set.
5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
7. To stop operation, press the stop key.
1-3-23
3P2

U073 Method: [Home Position]
1. Select [Home Position].
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position.
Method: [Dust Check]

1. Select [Dust Check].
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop key.
Method: [DP Reading]

1. Select [DP Reading].
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position.
Completion
Press the stop key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
U074 DP input response adjustment
Description
Sets the density correction for scanning originals from the DP.
Purpose
Modify the setting only if a spotted background appears when a bluish original or a document
with a background that is slightly colored is scanned from the DP.
Perform adjustment if the page scanned using the table and the page scanned using DP do not
match.
Setting
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Coefficient Compensating original document 0 to 3 1
scanning density
Settings 0: No correction / 1: Slight correction / 2: Medium correction / 3: Strong correction
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).
Completion
1-3-24
3P2

U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation
Description
The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing
edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. If dust
is identified, the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.
Using image correction to reduce black streaks.
Purpose
When using DP, to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to
original reading position.
Caution
The coordinates of position where documents are scanned are modified when [System Menu]
[Adjustment/Maintenance] [Correcting Black Line] is set to [Off].
Method
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
CCD Setting of standard data when dust is detected.
Black Line Initialization of original reading position.
Setting: [CCD]
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
R Lowest density of the R regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
G Lowest density of the G regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
B Lowest density of the B regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
Method: [Black Line]

1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The setting is cleared.
Completion
1-3-25
3P2

U091 Setting the white line correction
Description
Sets the error detection threshold value for white line correction and displays the count result of
abnormal pixels.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the CIS, DP driver PWB or CIS roller.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Calculation(R) Abnormal pixel count result for color R
Calculation(G) Abnormal pixel count result for color G
Calculation(B) Abnormal pixel count result for color B
Threshold(R) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color R
Threshold(G) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color G
Threshold(B) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color B
Threshold Abnormal pixel threshold value setting
(Abnormal)
Mode Switching between white line correction mode ON/OFF
Execute Holding of white reference data
Method: white line correction

1. Press [Execute].
2. Press the start key. Holding of white reference data is started.
3. The count result of abnormal pixels is displayed.
5. Place a gray original on the DP with the gray side down. Load paper in the cassette.
The paper should be the same size as the original.
Two test pattern sheets will be printed. (1st sheet: Approx. 60 mm black band, 2nd sheet:
Blank paper (There is a case of an approx. 60 mm gray band.))
7. If no vertical lines appear on either sheet, the setting has been completed normally.
If vertical black lines appear on the blank paper (gray band) and vertical white lines appear in
the black band in the same position, clean the CIS roller and the CIS glass and then repeat
white line correction.
If vertical black lines or vertical white lines appear on both sheets, white line correction has
been completed normally. However, the cause of the vertical lines lies in the engine, and thus
the engine must be checked.
Mode is set to 1.
1-3-26
3P2

U091 How to view test copies
blank sheet black band Causes Corrective measures
No lines No lines - Complete
Black lines White lines Dirty CIS roller or CIS Clean CIS roller or CIS glass
glass and then perform U091 again
Black lines No lines Engine side U091 ends, check engine
No lines White lines Engine side U091 ends, check engine
Setting: Threshold value setting

2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Threshold(R) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection 0 to 1023 112
threshold value for color R
Threshold(G) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection 0 to 1023 112
threshold value for color G
Threshold(B) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection 0 to 1023 112
threshold value for color B
Threshold Abnormal pixel threshold value setting 0 to 8191 75
(Abnormal)
Mode Switching between white line correction 0: OFF/ 0
mode ON/OFF 1: ON/
2: Test mode
* : Normally the Threshold (Com) value should not be changed from 112, the initial setting.
If white lines appear even though the CIS roller and glass are not dirty, raise the set value.
If fine lines in some originals disappear, lower the set value.
Set within the range 50 to 200. (If set outside this range, the image may be affected.)
Completion
1-3-27
3P2

U099 Adjusting original size detection
Description
Checks the operation of the original size detection and sets the sensing threshold value.
Purpose
Modify the threshold of detection if documents are frequently mal-detected in size after scanning
a wholly dark document or a document enclosed with dark objects on edges.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Data1 Displaying original size detection transmission data
B/W Level1 B/W LEVEL setting original size sensor threshold value
Data2 Displaying original size sensor transmission data
(when DP is installed)
Method: [Data1/Data2]
1. Place the original and close the original cover or DP. The detection sensor transmission data
is displayed.
2. The light source illuminates and the CCD sensor determines the width of the document. The
original size sensor determines the document is vertical or horizontal. (The document is
detected two times when the DP is installed.)
Display Description
Original Area R Detected original width size for color (R)
Original Area G Detected original width size for color (G)
Original Area B Detected original width size for color (B)
Original Area Detected original width size
Size SW L Displays the original size sensor (OSS) ON/OFF
1-3-28
3P2

U099 Setting: [B/W Level1]
1. Select an item to be set.
Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.l
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting*
Original R1 Original threshold value for color R (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original R2 Original threshold value for color R (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original R3 Original threshold value for color R (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
Original G1 Original threshold value for color G (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original G2 Original threshold value for color G (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original G3 Original threshold value for color G (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
Original B1 Original threshold value for color B (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original B2 Original threshold value for color B (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original B3 Original threshold value for color B (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
*:DP is not installed/DP is installed
Reducing the value increases the sensitivity of the sensor allowing a document with more density
to be detected, however, the document mat could be detected as an original document.
If the values vary excessively, mal-detection could occur depending on how a document is
placed.
Original mat Original

Fig. Original width size range
R/G/B
1 1 A4R to A3 8.5" to 11"
1 2 3 2 2 B6R to A4R 5.5" to 8.5"
297 mm 3 3 to B6R to 5.5"
Figure 1-3-9
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-29
3P2

U203 Checking DP operation
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
To check the DP operation.
Method
2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the speed to be operated.
Display Description
Normal Speed Normal reading (600 dpi)
High Speed High-speed reading
Display Description
CCD ADP With paper, single-sided original of CCD
CIS With paper, double-sided original of CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P) Without paper, single-sided original of CCD
(continuous operation)
CIS (Non-P) Without paper, double-sided original of CIS
(continuous operation)
5. Press the start key. The operation starts.

6. To stop continuous operation, press the stop key.
Completion
1-3-30
3P2

U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors
Description
Turns the motors in the DP on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the DP motors.
Method
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Feed Motor DP feed motor (DPOFM) is turned on
Conv Motor DP conveying motor (DPOCM) is turned on
Lift Motor DP lift motor (DPLM) is turned on
Eje Motor DP eject motor (DPEM) is turned on
Reg Motor DP registration motor (DPRM) is turned on
DP Fan DP fan motor1 (DPFM1) is turned on
CIS Fan DP fan motor2 (DPFM2) is turned on
4. To turn each motor off, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
1-3-31
3P2

U244 Checking the DP switches
Description
Displays the status of the respective switches and sensors in the DP.
Purpose
To check if respective switches and sensors in the DP operate correctly.
Method
2. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When a switch or sensor is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch or
sensor reverses.
Display Switches and sensors
Feed DP feed sensor (DPFS)
Timing DP timing sensor (DPTS)
CIS Head DP CIS sensor (DPCS)
Set DP original sensor (DPOS)
Longitudinal DP original length switch (DPOLSW)
Lift U-Limit DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1)
Lift L-Limit DP lift sensor 2 (DPLS2)
Cover Open DP interlock switch (DPILSW)
Open DP open/close switch (DPOCSW)
Eject DP eject sensor (DPES)
Completion
1-3-32
3P2

U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication
Description
Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease
by the rubbish on the contact glass when scanning from the DP.
Method
2. Select the item to set. The screen for setting each item is displayed.
Display Description
Black Line Mode Black line cleaning guidance ON/OFF setting
Black Line Cnt Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication
Setting: [Black Line Mode]

1. Select [On] or [Off].
Display Description
On Displays the cleaning guidance
Off Not to display the cleaning guidance
* : Initial setting: On
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Black Line Cnt]

1. Select [Cnt].
2. Change the setting value using the cursor +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Cnt Setting counts of the cleaning guidance 0 to 255 8
indication ( x 1000 sheets)
* : When setting is 0, the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is
detected.
Completion
1-3-33
3P2

U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect.
Adjustment
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description
A Margin DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
B Margin DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mm
C Margin DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
D Margin DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
A Margin DP left margin (second side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
(Back)
B Margin DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mm
(Back) (second side)
C Margin DP right margin (second side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
(Back)
D Margin DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
(Back) (second side)
6. Change the setting value using the cursor +/- keys or numeric keys.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
DP leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm)
DP left margin DP right margin

(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
DP trailing edge margin

(4.0 mm or less)
Figure 1-3-10
1-3-34
3P2

0404 Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins, perform the following maintenance
modes.
U039 U034 U402 U403 U404
Completion
1-3-35
3P2

U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP
scanning sections.
Purpose
To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Perform adjustments using a new test chart (chart 1) when replacing ISC PWB, LED lamp PWB,
ISU, CIS and/or DP main PWB.
Method
2. Select the item.
Original to be used
Display Description
for adjustment (P/N)
Table (Chart1) Automatic adjustment in the scanner sec- 7505000005
tion (chart 1)
DP FaceUp Do not use. 7505000005
(Chart1) Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning
section (first side) (chart 1)
DP FaceDown Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning 7505000005
(Chart1) section (second side) (chart 1)
Table (Chart2) Automatic adjustment in the scanner sec- 302FZ56990
tion (chart 2)
DP FaceUp Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning 302AC68243
(Chart2) section (first side) (chart 2)
DP FaceDown Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning 302AC68243/
(Chart2) section (second side) (chart 2) 303JX57010/
303JX57020
Target Set-up for obtaining the target value -
DP Auto Adj Automatic adjustment of automatic docu- -
ment processor using the chart printed
from the machine
Method: [Table (Chart1)]

To manually enter the target value
1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the specified original
(P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the platen.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [Table (Chart1)].
7. Select the item.
1-3-36
3P2

U411 To automatically enter the target value
1. Enter the value for [Adjust Original] using maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the platen.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [Auto] and press the start key.
7. Select the item.
Display Description
All Executing the all scanner adjustment
LED/AGC Executing the adjustment for LED light quantity/AGC
White Executing the white reference compensation coefficient
Input Executing the adjustment for magnification, leading edge tim-
ing and center line
C.A. Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter
MTF Executing the adjustment for MTF filter
Gamma Executing the adjustment for input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment for matrix
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning.
Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart1)]

2. Set a specified original on the DP face up.
4. Select [Target].
6. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart1)].
7. Select [Input].
To automatically enter the target value

2. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face up.
4. Select [Target].
7. Select [Input].
1-3-37
3P2

U411
Display Description
Input Executing the adjustment for input gamma and matrix
ning.
Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart1)]

2. Set a specified original on the DP face down.
4. Select [Target].
6. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)].
7. Select [All].
To automatically enter the target value

2. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face down.
4. Select [Target].
6. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)].
7. Select [All].
Display Description
All Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second
side) for magnification, leading edge timing, center line, MTF
filter, input gamma and matrix
ning.
1-3-38
3P2

U411 Method: [Table (Chart2)]
1. Enter the target values which are shown on the back of the specified original
(P/N: 302FZ56990) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the platen.
4. Select [Target].
7. Select the item.
Display Description
All Executing the all scanner adjustment
Input Executing the adjustment for magnification, leading edge tim-
ing and center line
C.A. Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter
MTF Executing the adjustment for MTF filter
Gamma Executing the adjustment for input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment for matrix
ning.
Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart2)]

1. Measure the leading edge, main scanning, and auxiliary scanning of the specified original (P/
N: 302AC68243) and enter the values by executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) on the DP.
Cut the trailing edge of the original.
5 mm
149 ± 1 mm
74 ± 1 mm
Figure 1-3-11
4. Select [Target].
7. Select [INPUT].
Display Description
Input Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (first
side) for magnification, leading edge timing and center line
1-3-39
3P2

U411 8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
ning.
Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart2)]

1. Place the specified original for acquiring gamma target data (P/N: 303JX57010) on the
platen, and press the start key.
2. Place the specified original for acquiring matrix target data (P/N: 303JX57020) on the platen,
and press the start key.
When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
3. Select the item.
Original to be used
Display Description
for adjustment (P/N)
All Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 302AC68243/
ning section (second side) for magnifica- 303JX57010/
tion, leading edge timing, center line, MTF 303JX57020
filter, input gamma and matrix
Input Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 302AC68243
ning section (second side) for magnifica-
tion, leading edge timing and center line
MTF/Gamma Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 303JX57010
ning section (second side) for MTF filter
and input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 303JX57020
ning section (second side) for matrix
[Input]
1. Select [Input].
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 302AC6824) on the DP face down.
[MTF/Gamma]
1. Select [MTF/Gamma].
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57010) on the DP face down.
[Matrix]
1. Select [Matrix].
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57020) on the DP face down.
When [ALL] is selected, the adjustment of [Input], [MTF/Gamma] and [Matrix] can be executed at
once. When adjusting, place the three specified originals on the DP face down, and then press
the start key.
Set the original 303JX57020, and then place 303JX57010 and 302AC68243 in order on the top
of the original.
1-3-40
3P2

U411 * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
ning.
Method: [DP Auto Adj]

1. Load A4/letter paper.
2. Press the start key to output the original for adjustment.
3. Set the output the original for adjustment and press the start key.
4. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face up.
5. Press the start key to scan documents.
6. Press the start key. Auto adjustment of first side starts.
7. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face down.
8. Press the start key to scan documents.
9. Press the start key. Auto adjustment of second side starts.
ning.
Error Codes
Codes Description
01 Black band detection error (scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge
skew)
02 Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction far end skew)
03 Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction near end skew)
03 Black band detection error (scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge
skew)
04 Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
05 Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction far end)
06 Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction near end)
07 Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
08 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction far end)
09 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction near end)
0a Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
0b Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge origi-
nal check)
0c Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
0d White band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
0e DMA time out
0f Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error
10 Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge error
11 Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge error
1-3-41
3P2

U411 Error Codes
Codes Description
12 DP uxiliary scanning direction skew error
13 Maintenance request error
14 Main scanning direction center line error
15 DP main scanning direction skew error
16 Main scanning direction magnification error
17 Service call error
18 DP paper misfeed error
19 PWB replacement error
1a Original error
1b Input gamma adjustment original error
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1d Original for the white reference compensation coefficient error
1e Lab value searching error
1f Lab value comparing error
63 Completed to obtain a test RAW
Completion
1-3-42
3P2

U425 Setting the target
Description
Enters the lab values that is indicated of the chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005) or chart 2
(P/N: 302FZ56990) used for adjustment.
Purpose
Performs data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment.
Method
Select the chart to be used.
Display Description
Chart1 Chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005)
Chart2 Chart 2 (P/N: 302FZ56990)
Method: [Chart1]
Display Description
White Setting the white patch for the original for adjustment
Black Setting the black patch for the original for adjustment
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the original for adjustment
C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment
M Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment
Y Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment
R Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment
G Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment
B Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
Adjust Original Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions
Display Description Setting range
L Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0
a Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0
b Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0
4. Enters the value that is indicated on the face of the chart using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
1-3-43
3P2

U425 Setting: [Adjust Original]
1. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A, B
and C.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A
(30 mm from the left edge), B (148.5 mm from the left edge) and C (267 mm from the left
edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + B + C) / 3)
2. Enter the values solved using the cursor+/- keys or numeric keys in [Dist1].
4. Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F.
1) Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F
(15 mm from the top edge of black belt 1).
5. Enter the values using the cursor +/- keys or numeric keys in [Dist2].
7. Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D and E.
1) Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D (30 mm from the left edge) and E (267 mm from the left edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2 + E/2)
8. Enter the measured value using the cursor +/- keys or numeric keys in [Dist3].
30mm 148.5mm 267mm

A Black belt 1 B C Leading edge
15mm
Black
belt 2
D E
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
Left edge
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Original for adjustment (P/N:7505000005) Black belt 3

Figure 1-3-12
1-3-44
3P2

U425 Method: [Chart2]
2. Select the item.
Display Description
CCD Entering the target values of the chart (P/N: 302FZ56990)
used for adjustment
DP Entering the measurement value of the chart (P/N:
302AC68243) used for adjustment
CIS Execution is not required
Method: [CCD]
Display Description
N875 Setting the N875 patch for the original for adjustment
C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment
M Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment
Y Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment
R Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment
G Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment
B Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
Adjust Original Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions
Display Description Setting range
L Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0
a Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0
b Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0
3. Enters the value that is indicated on the back of the chart using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
1-3-45
3P2

U425 Setting: [Adjust Original]
1. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A, B and C.
1) Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A (30 mm from
the leading edge), B (148.5 mm from the leading edge) and C (267 mm from the leading
edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2
2. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Lead].
4. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt (b) of the original at D, E and F.
1) Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt (b) of the original at D (35 mm from
the left edge), E (110 mm from the left edge) and F (185 mm from the left edge), respec-
tively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2
5. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Main Scan].
7. Measure the length (G) from the edge of the black belt (a) to edge of N475 of the original.
8. Enter the measured value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Sub Scan].
Leading edge
30 mm 148.5 mm 267 mm
Left edge
A B C
Black
35 mm belt (a)
D
Black Black
belt (b) belt (c)
110 mm G [Lead] =
E
((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2
[Main Scan] =
((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2
[Sub Scan] = G
185 mm
F
Original for adjustment (P/N: 302FZ56990)
Figure 1-3-13
1-3-46
3P2

U425 Setting: [DP]
1. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at A.
2. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [Lead].
3. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at B.
4. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [Main Scan].
5. Measure the distance from the black belt of leading edge (inside) to the black belt of trailing
edge (inside) of the original at C.
6. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [Sub Scan].
Original for adjustment (P/N: 302AC68243)

Figure 1-3-14
Completion
1-3-47
3P2

U905 Checking counts by optional devices
Description
Displays the counts of document processor or 1000/4000-sheet document finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of document processor or 1000/4000-sheet document finisher.
Method
2. Select the device to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed.
Display Description
DP Counts of document processor
DF Counts of 1000/4000-sheet document finisher
DP
Display Description
ADP Counts of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP
CIS Counts of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
DF
Display Description
Sorter Counts of copies that has passed through the sorter
Staple Frequency the stapler has been activated
Punch Frequency the punch has been activated
Stack* Frequency the main tray eject has been activated
Saddle* Frequency the center holding has been activated
Fold* Frequency the middle folding has been activated
Three Fold* Frequency the three folding has been activated
* : 4000-sheet document finisher only
Completion
1-3-48
3P2

U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP
Description
Adjusts the deflection generated when the document processor is used.
Purpose
Use this mode if an original non-feed jam, oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the
document processor is used.
Setting
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.l
Display Description
Front Deflection of single-sided origi- -31 to 31 0 0.17mm
nal
Mix Deflection of mixed original -31 to 31 0 0.17 mm
* : The greater the value, the larger the deflection; the smaller the value, the smaller the
deflection.
If an original non-feed jam or oblique feed occurs, increase the setting value. If wrinkling
of original occurs, decrease the value.
Completion
U990 Checking the time for the exposure lamp to light
Description
Displays the accumulated time for the CIS to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the CIS.
Method
The accumulated time for the CIS to light is displayed in minutes.
Display Description
CIS The accumulated time for the CIS to light
Completion
1-3-49
3P2
1-3-50
3P2
1-4-1 Original misfeed detection

1-4 Troubleshooting
(1) Original misfeed indication

When an original jams, the machine immediately stops operation and a message is shown on the machine
operation panel.
To remove the jammed original, open the DP top cover or switchback unit.
Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off
and on.
(2) Original misfeed detection conditions
DPLS1
DPFS
DPSS
DPOS DPLS2
DPCS
DPES
DPTS
Figure 1-4-1
1-4-1
3P2
Code Contents Conditions

9000 No original feed DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn on within specified time
during the first sheet feeding (Retry 5 times).
9001 DP original conveying jam DP timing sensor (DPTS) turns off within the specified time since
the sensor turns on.
9002 DP sensor stay jam Sensor in the conveying system is on since original feeding
starts..
9005 No original feed 2 DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1) does not turn on within specified time of
the lift board rising.
9008 No original feed 3 DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn on within specified time of
the paper feed starting.
DP original conveying jam2 Next feed original became the stand-by states of paper feed
9009
while reading the image.
9010 Document processor open Document processor is opened during original feeding.
9011 DP top cover open The DP top cover is opened during original feeding.
Original skew feed jam DP ckew sensor (DPSS) does not turn on within specified time of
9020
DP registration sensor (DPRS) turning on.
9110 DP feed sensor stay jam DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn off within specified time of
DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on.
9300 DP CIS sensor non arrival DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn on within specified time of
jam DP registration sensor (DPRS) turning on.
9310 DP CIS sensor stay jam DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn off within specified time of
DP registration sensor (DPRS) turning off.
9400 DP timing sensor non DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn on within specified time
arrival jam during original feeding (Retry 5 times).
DP timing sensor stay jam DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn off within specified time
9410
of DP feed sensor (DPFS) turning off.
9600 DP eject sensor non arrival DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn on within specified time of
jam DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on.
9610 DP eject sensor stay jam DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn off within specified time of
DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning off.
1-4-2
3P2
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the
problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem.
A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches off and back
on.
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Check procedures
Code Contents Causes
corrective measures
3210 CIS lamp error Defective con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for
When input value at the time of CIS nector cable or continuity within the connector cable. If
illumination does not exceed the poor contact in none, replace the cable.
threshold value between 5 s. the connector. DP main PWB (YC1) and ISC PWB
(YC12)
ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11)
Defective CIS. Replace the CIS and check for correct
operation.
Defective DP Replace the DP main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
3310 CIS AGC error Defective CIS. Replace the CIS and check for correct
After AGC, correct input is not operation.
obtained at CIS.
9000 Document processor communica- Defective con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for
tion error nector cable or continuity within the connector cable. If
Communication with the document poor contact in none, replace the cable.
processor is not possible. the connector. DP main PWB (YC1) and ISC PWB
(YC12)
ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11)
Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB or the ISC
PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-3
3P2
Check procedures
Code Contents Causes
corrective measures
9040 DP lift motor ascending error Defective con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for
When the DP lift motor is driven, DP nector cable or continuity within the connector cable. If
lift sensor 1 does not turn on within poor contact in none, replace the cable.
1500 pulse. the connector. DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
(Three recovery times.) DP lift sensor 1 and DP main PWB
The above has been detected 5 (YC4)
times.
Defective DP lift Replace the DP lift sensor 1.
sensor 1.
Defective DP lift Replace the DP lift motor.
motor.
9050 DP lift motor descending error Defective con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for
When the DP lift motor is driven, DP nector cable or continuity within the connector cable. If
lift sensor 2 does not turn on within poor contact in none, replace the cable.
1500 pulse. the connector. DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
(Three recovery times.) DP lift sensor 2 and DP main PWB
The above has been detected 5 (YC2)
times. Defective DP lift Replace the DP lift sensor 2.
sensor 2.
Defective DP lift Replace the DP lift motor.
motor.
9060 DP EEPROM error Defective DP Replace the DP main PWB and check
Mismatch of reading data from two main PWB. for correct operation.
locations occurs 3 times succes- Device damage Contact the Service Administrative Divi-
sively.
of EEPROM. sion.
Mismatch between writing data and
reading data occurs 3 times succes-
sively.
9070 Communication error between DP Defective con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for
and SHD nector cable or continuity within the connector cable. If
A communication error is detected. poor contact in none, replace the cable.
the connector. SHD PWB and DP main PWB (YC10)
Defective SHD Replace the SHD PWB and check for
PWB. correct operation.
LED fault detection Defective con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for
When the power supply is turned nector cable or continuity within the connector cable. If
9080
on,the peak value of LED is 80hex or poor contact in none, replace the cable.
less. the connector. SHD PWB and DP main PWB (YC10)
Defective DP Replace the DP CIS.
CIS.
Defective SHD Replace the SHD PWB and check for
PWB. correct operation.
1-4-4
3P2
1-4-3 Electrical problems

Troubleshooting to each failure must be made in the order of the numbered symptoms.
Problem Causes Check procedures / corrective measures

(1) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The LED lamp cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not turn on tact in the connector. DP original sensor and DP main PWB (YC2)
when an original is DP LED PWB and DP main PWB (YC4_B)
present on the DP.
2. Defective sensor. Replace the DP original sensor.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP LED PWB or DP main PWB and check for
correct operation.
The size of the cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
original on the DP tact in the connector. DP original width switch and DP main PWB (YC2)
is not displayed DP original length switch and DP main PWB (YC2)
correctly. 2. Defective switch. Replace the DP original width switch or DP original length
switch.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
DP feed motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. DP feed motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the DP feed motor.
DP regijstration cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. DP registration motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
operate. 2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the DP registration motor.
1-4-5
3P2

DP conveying cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. DP conveying motor and DP main PWB (YC14)
operate. 2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the DP conveying motor.
DP eject motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. DP eject motor and DP main PWB (YC14)
2. Defective connector Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
cable or poor con- grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
tact in the connector. replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the DP eject motor.

DP lift motor does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
not operate. tact in the connector. DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
2. Defective connector Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
cable or poor con- grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
tact in the connector. replace if any.
3. Defective motor Replace the DP lift motor.

DP fan motor 1 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. DP fan motor 1 and DP main PWB (YC7)
2. Defective fan motor. Replace the DP fan motor 1.

DP fan motor 2 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. DP fan motor 2 and DP main PWB (YC8)
2. Defective fan motor. Replace the DP fan motor 2.

1-4-6
3P2

(10) 1. A piece of paper torn Check visually and remove it, if any.
An original jams from an original is
when the main caught around the
power switch is DP feed sensor, DP
turned on. CIS sensor, DP
timing sensor, DP
eject sensor.
2. Defective sensor. Replace the DP feed sensor, DP CIS sensor, DP timing
sensor or DP eject sensor.
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing the cover is tact in the connector. DP interlock switch and DP main PWB (YC6)
open is displayed 2. Defective switch. Replace the DP interlock switch.
when the DP top
cover is closed.
The table is cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
scanned when DP tact in the connector. DP open/close switch and DP main PWB (YC4_B)
is closed and the 2. Defective DP shut- Check the hinges and DP reading guide.
original is set. ting.
3. Defective switch. Replace the DP open/close switch.
The original is cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
plagiotropic. tact in the connector. DP skew sensor and DP main PWB (YC4_B)
2. Defective switch. Replace the DP skew sensor.

1-4-7
3P2
1-4-4 Mechanical problems

Problem Causes / check procedures Corrective measures
(1) Check if the surfaces of the following pul- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No primary original leys are dirty with paper powder.
feed. DP forwarding pulley
DP feed belt
Check if the following pulleys is Check visually and replace any
deformed. deformed (see page 1-5-2).
DP forwarding pulley
DP feed belt
(2) Original is not correctly set. Set the original correctly.

Multiple sheets of orig- Check if the DP separation pulley is
Replace the DP separation pulley if it is
inal are fed.
worn. worn (see page 1-5-6).
(3) Originals being used do not conform with Use only originals conforming to the
Originals jam. the specifications. specifications.
Check if the surfaces of the following pul- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
leys are dirty with paper powder.
DP feed belt
Check if the contact between the DP reg- Check visually and remedy if necessary.
istration roller and DP registration pulley
is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP Check visually and remedy if necessary.
upper conveying roller and DP conveying
pulley is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP left Check visually and remedy if necessary.
conveying roller and DP conveying pulley
is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP right Check visually and remedy if necessary.
conveying roller and DP conveying pulley
is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP Check visually and remedy if necessary.
eject roller and DP eject pulley is correct.
1-4-8
3P2
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly

1-5 Assembly and Disassembly
(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to turn power off. Make sure that the
Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug
the power cable from the wall outlet.
Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the internal
hard disk.
When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible
to static charge.
Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
When removing the hook of the connector, be sure to release the hook.
Take care not to get the cables caught.
To reassemble the parts, use the original screws. If the types and the sizes of screws are not known, refer to
the PARTS LIST.
1-5-1
3P2
1-5-2 Assembly and disassembly

(1) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley
Follow the procedure below to replace the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley.
Procedure
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Remove two screws from the DP feed
guide.
Screw
Screw
DP feed guide
Figure 1-5-1
3. Turns upward and then remove the DP DP feed guide

feed guide.
Figure 1-5-2
1-5-2
3P2
4. Turns the DP feed unit upward.
DP feed unit
Figure 1-5-3
5. Remove the stop ring from front side of

the DP feed belt shaft A. DP feed unit
6. Pull forwards and then remove the DP
feed unit from the DP.
Stop ring
DP feed belt shaft A
Figure 1-5-4
1-5-3
3P2
7. Remove the stop ring from the DP feed

belt shaft A. DP feed unit
8. Remove the stop ring and pulley from
Pulley
the DP feed unit.
9. Slide the DP feed holder and then
remove the DP feed belt unit from the
Stop ring
DP feed unit.
DP feed belt
Stop ring shaft A
DP feed belt unit

DP feed holder
Figure 1-5-5
10. Remove the DP feed holder A from the

DP feed belt shaft A.
11. Pull out the DP feed belt shaft A from
the DP feed belt unit and then remove
the DP feed collar A.
Drive belt
DP feed belt unit
Pullay
DP feed holder B
DP feed holder A
DP feed belt shaft A
DP feed collar A
Figure 1-5-6
1-5-4
3P2
12. Remove the stop ring from the DP feed DP feed belt shaft B
belt shaft B.
13. Pull out the DP feed belt shaft B from
the DP feed belt unit.
14. Remove the DP feed collar B and DP
feed belt from the DP feed belt shaft B.
DP feed collar B
DP feed belt unit
Stop ring DP feed belt
Figure 1-5-7
15. Remove the stop ring from the DP feed Pulley

belt shaft B. DP forwarding
16. Pull out the DP forwarding pulley shaft pulley shaft
from the DP feed unit and then remove DP feed unit
the DP forwarding pulley.
17. Check or replace the DP feed belt and
DP forwarding pulley and refit all the
removed parts.
Bush
Stop ring
Figure 1-5-8
1-5-5
3P2
(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley

Follow the procedure below to replace the DP separation pulley.
Procedure
DP top cover
2. Remove the DP feed guide and DP
feed unit. (Seepage1-5-2)
3. Unhook the hook and then remove the DP separation pulley cover
DP separation pulley cover. Hook
Figure 1-5-9
4. Remove the stop ring and then remove

the DP separation pulley and torque Stop ring
limiter. Torque limiter
5. Check or replace the DP separation
pulley and refit all the removed parts. DP separation
pulley
Figure 1-5-10
1-5-6
3P2
(3) Detaching and refitting the CIS

Follow the procedure below to replace the CIS.
Procedure DP top cover Screw

2. Remove four screws from the upper DP front left cover
side and reverse side of DP. Screw
3. Pull forwards and then remove the DP
front left cover and DP front cover.
DP front cover
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-11
4. Remove four screws and then remove Screw

DP rear cover
the DP rear cover.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-12
1-5-7
3P2
5. Remove two screws from the rear side

of machine and then remove the CIS
unit upwards.
Screw
Screw
CIS unit
Figure 1-5-13
6. Remove two connectors from the DP Connector

SHD PWB.
Connector
DP SHD PWB
Figure 1-5-14
1-5-8
3P2
7. Remove the CIS front holder and CIS Marking (black) CIS slit glass
rear holder and then remove the CIS slit CIS rear holder
holder and the CIS upwards.
* : Makre sure that dusts and dirt do not

adhere to the CIS sensor when it is
exposed with the CIS slit glass
removed.
Dusts and dirt adhered to the sensor
CIS front holer
can impair the scanning performance.
CIS
CIS guide
Figure 1-5-15
8. Remove six pins by using a flat screw-

driver and then remove the DP SHD
PWB.
9. Check or replace the CIS and refit all CIS guide
the removed parts.
* : Make sure to install the correct face Flat screwdriver
of the CIS slit glass as it is two-faced.
Observe the marking as shown.
Installing the CIS sensor with the
wrong face can impair the scanning
performance as paper dusts may
adhere to the sensor.
10. When the CIS is replaced with a new
one, carry out the following procedure.
11. Clean the CIS roller and contact glass
(CIS).
12. Perform maintenance mode U091 (set-
ting the white line correction) (see page
1-3-26). DP SHD PWB Pin
13. Make a test copy of a gray document.
If problems such as white lines appear
Pin
on the test copy, repeat the procedure
from steps 11 to 12 onwards until the
white lines no longer appear.
Figure 1-5-16
14. Perform maintenance mode U411
(Adjusting the scanner automatically)
(see page 1-3-36).
1-5-9
3P2
1-5-3 Image adjustment

(1) Adjusting the angle of leading edge
Perform the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is laterally skewed.
Procedure
3mm/4mm 3mm/4mm
1. Place an original on the DP and press
the start key to make a test copy.
2. If the gap of leading edge exceeds the
reference value, perform the following
adjustment.
Reference value
For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm Original Copy Copy
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm example 1 example 2
Figure 1-5-17
3. Loosen two screws of right and left fix-

ing fittings.
Fixing fitting
Screw
Screw
Fixing fitting
Screw
Fixing fitting
Figure 1-5-18
1-5-10
3P2
4. Remove the left hinge cover.

5. Turn adjusting screw at the rear side of
the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example 1: Turn the adjusting
screw counterclockwise and move the
DP to the inner side.
For copy example 2: Turn the adjusting
screw clockwise and move the DP to
the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1
mm Right hinge cover
6. Make a test copy.
7. Repeat the steps above until the gap of
the leading edge falls within the refer-
ence values.
8. After adjustment is completed, retighten
two screws that have been loosened in
step 3. Adjusting screw
Figure 1-5-19
9. Remove the original mat.

10. Place original mat with its Velcro
upward over the contact glass.
Align original mat corner that has 90
degrees of angle with the inner left cor-
ner of the original instruction panel.
11. Close DP and attach original mat onto it
with Velcro.
DP
Original mat
Original mat
Velcro
Figure 1-5-20
1-5-11
3P2
(2) Adjusting the angle of trailing edge

Perform the following adjustment if the trailing edge of the copy image is laterally skewed.
Procedure
1. Place an original on the DP and press
the start key to make a test copy.
2. If the gap of trailing edge exceeds the
reference value, perform the following
adjustment.
Reference value 3mm/4mm 3mm/4mm
Original Copy Copy
For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
example 1 example 2
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm
Figure 1-5-21
3. Open the DP top cover. DP top cover

4. Remove the right hinge cover.
5. Remove the screw and then remove the
left hinge cover.
Screw
Left hinge cover
Right hinge cover
Figure 1-5-22
1-5-12
3P2
6. Remove four screws and then remove

the DP rear cover. Screw
DP rear cover
Screw
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-23
7. Adjust the height of DP.

Loosen the nut.
For copy example 1: Loosen the adjust-
ing screw.
For copy example 2: Tighten the adjust-
ing screw.
Amount of change per scale: Approx.
0.5 mm
Retighten the nut.
8. Refit the DP rear cover. Adjusting screw
9. Refit the right hinge cover and left hinge Nut
cover.
Scale
Figure 1-5-24
1-5-13
3P2
10. Remove the original mat.

11. Place original mat with its Velcro
upward over the contact glass.
Align original mat corner that has 90
degrees of angle with the inner left cor-
ner of the original instruction panel.
12. Close DP and attach original mat onto it
with Velcro.
DP
Original mat
Original mat
Velcro
Figure 1-5-25
13. Make a test copy again.

14. Repeat steps 1 to 12 above until the
gap of the trailing edge falls within the
reference values.
1-5-14
3P2
1-6-1 Remarks on DP main PWB replacement

1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement
(1) DP main PWB

When replacing the DP main PWB, remove the EEPROM (YS1) from the DP main PWB that has been
removed and then reattach it to the new DP main PWB.
EEPROM
YS1
Figure 1-6-1 DP main PWB
When the DP main PWB is replaced with a new one, carry out the following procedure.
1. Clean the CIS roller and contact glass (CIS).
2. Perform maintenance mode U411 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) (see page 1-3-36).
3. Perform maintenance mode U091 (setting the white line correction) (see page 1-3-26).
If problems such as white lines appear on the test copy, repeat the procedure from steps 1 to 3
onwards until the white lines no longer appear.
(2) DP SHD PWB

When the DP SHD PWB is replaced with a new one, carry out the following procedure.
1. Clean the CIS roller and contact glass (CIS).
2. Perform maintenance mode U411 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) (see page 1-3-36).
3. Perform maintenance mode U091 (setting the white line correction) (see page 1-3-26).
If problems such as white lines appear on the test copy, repeat the procedure from steps 1 to 3
onwards until the white lines no longer appear.
1-6-1
3P2
1-6-2
3P2
2-1-1 Original feed section

2-1 Mechanical Construction
The original feed section consists of the parts shown in figure. An original placed on the original table is con-
veyed to the original conveying section. Original is fed by the rotation of the DP forwarding pulley and DP orig-
inal feed belt. The DP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time, via the torque
limiter.
6 5 7 9 4 3 2 1
10 11 8
Figure 2-1-1 Original feed section
(1)Original tray (7)DP feed collar B

(2)DP original width switch (DPOWSW) (8)DP separation pulley
(3)Original lift guide (9)DP original sensor (DPOS)
(4)DP forwarding pulley (10)DP feed sensor (DPFS)
(5)DP feed belt (11)DP skew sensor (DPSS)
(6)DP feed collar A
2-1-1
FEED_2B,2A,1A,1B
YC5-1,2,3,4
DPOFM
FD_SW
YC4-A5
DPFS
SKEW_SW
YC4-B13
LIFT_2B,2A,1A,1B DPSS
YC5-9,10,11,12
DPLM
LF_DNSW
YC2-10
DPLS2
DPLS1
LF_UPSW
YC4-A3
2-1-2
SET_SW
YC2-6
DPOS
DPMPWB
Figure 2-1-2 Original feed section block diagram

WIDE3,2,1
YC2-11,12,14
DPOWSW
3P2
3P2
2-1-2 Original conveying section

The original conveying section consists of the parts shown in figure. A conveyed original is scanned by the
optical section (CCD) of machine when it passes through the slit glass of machine.
An original of which scanning is complete is ejected to the original eject table by the eject roller.
4 2
1
6 3 13 15
10 9 17 11 12 14 16
Figure 2-1-3 Original conveying section
(1)DP registration roller (10)DP conveying pulley

(2)DP registration pulley (11)DP right conveying roller
(3)DP upper conveying roller (12)DP conveying pulley
(4)DP conveying pulley (13)DP eject sensor (DPES)
(5)DP CIS sensor (DPCS) (14)DP eject roller
(6)DP CIS roller (15)DP eject pulley
(7)CIS (16)Slit glass (machine main body)
(8)DP timing sensor (DPTS) (17)Original eject table
(9)DP left conveying roller
2-1-3
3P2
DPMPWB
RGST_2B,2A,1A,1B
DPRM YC5-5,6,7,8
DPCS
CNVY_2B,2A,1B,1A
CIS DPOCM YC14-1,2,3,4
EXIT_SW
DPES YC4-A12
CCD_TMG_SW
DPTS YC4-B6
Image data
CIS_TMG_SW
RVRS_1B,1A,2A,2B
DPSBM YC14-5,6,7,8
Serial communication data signal

YC2
YC4-2
YC1 YC10
DPSPWB
YC3
YC2
DPRPWB
Figure 2-1-4 Original conveying section block diagram
2-1-4
3P2
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
(1) PWBs
1
3
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs
1. DP main PWB (DPMPWB) ................... Controls electrical components.

2. DP LED PWB (DPLPWB) ..................... Indicates presence of originals or an original jam.
3. DP SHD PWB (DPSPWB)....................... Controls the image processing.
4. DP relay PWB (DPRPWB) ...................... Relay of image data.
2-2-1
3P2
(2) Switches and sensors
4
2 6
8
7
10 9 3
5
12
11
1
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors
1. DP open/close switch (DPOCSW) ........ Detects the opening/closing of the DP.

2. DP interlock switch (DPILSW) .............. Breaks the safety circuit when the document processor is
opened; resets original misfeed detection.
3. DP original sensor (DPOS) ................... Detects the presence of an original.
4. DP lift sensor1 (DPLS1) ........................ Detects the original tray reaching the upper limit.
5. DP lift sensor2 (DPLS2) ........................ Detects the original tray reaching the lower limit.
6. DP original length switch (DPOLSW).... Detects the length of the original.
7. DP original width switch (DPOWSW).... Detects the width of the original.
8. DP feed sensor (DPFS) ........................ Detects primary original feed end timing.
9. DP skew sensor (DPSS)....................... Detects the original conveying timing.
10. DP CIS sensor (DPCS)......................... Detects the original scanning timing.
11. DP timing sensor (DPTS)...................... Detects the original scanning timing.
12. DP eject sensor (DPES) ....................... Detects an original misfeed in the original eject section.
2-2-2
3P2
(3) Motors
2 1
7
6 5
3
4
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
1. DP feed motor (DPOFM) ...................... Drives the original feeding section.

2. DP ragistration motor (DPRM) .............. Drives the DP registration roller.
3. DP conveying motor (DPOCM)............. Drives the original conveying section.
4. DP eject motor (DPEM) ........................ Drives the DP eject roller.
5. DP lift motor (DPLM)............................. Operates the original lift guide.
6. DP fan motor1 (DPFM1) ....................... Cools the drive section.
7. DP fan motor2 (DPFM2) ....................... Cools the CIS.
2-2-3
3P2
2-2-4
3P2
2-3-1 DP main PWB

2-3 Operation of the PWBs
14 13 1 15
2 16
YC1
YC10
YS1
2 1
B13 A1
YC4
B1 A13
1 2
1
YC2
YC6
13 3
14
1
YC7
2
1
YC8
2
1 YC14 8 12
YC5 1
Figure 2-3-1 DP main PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-1
3P2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC1 1 FG
Connected to 2 ENG_PAGES O 3.3 V DC Pageset signal
ISCPWB. T
3 ENG_RDY O 3.3 V DC Ready signal
4 ENG_SEL I 3.3 V DC Select signal
5 ENG_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
6 ENG_SI I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 ENG_SO O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
8 DP_OPEN O 3.3 V DC DPOCSW: On/Off
9 NC(GND) - - Not used
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 NC(GND) - - Not used
14 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from ISCPWB
YC2 1 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPOLSW

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
DP original 3 LNG_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPOLSW: On/Off
length switch,
DP original 4 LNG_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
sensor, DP lift 5 GND - - Ground
sensor 2, DP
6 SET_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPOS: On/Off
original width
switch. 7 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPOS
8 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPLS2
9 GND - - Ground
10 LF_DNSW I 0/3.3 V DC DPLS2: On/Off
11 WIDE3 I 0/3.3 V DC DPOWS: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
2-3-2
3P2

YC4_A A1 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPLS1
Connected to A2 GND - - Ground
DP lift sensor
A3 LF_UPSW I 0/3.3 V DC DPLS1: On/Off
1, DP feed
sensor, DP A4 GND - - Ground
eject sensor. A5 FD_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPFS: On/Off
A6 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPFS
A7 NC - - Not used
A8 NC - - Not used
A9 NC - - Not used
A10 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPES
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 EXIT_SW(M) I 0/3.3 V DC DPES: On/Off
A13 NC - - Not used
YC4_B B1 NC - - Not used

Connected to B2 LED_PW O 5.6 V DC 5.6 V DC power output to LEDPWB
DPLED PWB,
B3 LED_REM O 0/5.6 V DC LED control signal
DP timing
sensor, DP B4 NC(GND) - - Not used
open/close B5 GND - - Ground
switch, DP
B6 CCD_TMG_S I 0/3.3 V DC DPTS: On/Off
skew sensor.
W
B7 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPTS
B8 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPOCSW
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 DP_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC DPOCSW: On/Off
B11 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPSS
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 SKEW_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPSS: On/Off
2-3-3
3P2

1 FEED3_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
YC5
2B
Connected to 2 FEED1_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
DP feed 2A
motor, DP
3 FEED2_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
registration
1A
motor, DP lift
motor. 4 FEED4_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
1B
5 RGST3_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPRM drive control signal
2B
2A
1A
1B
9 LIFT3_OUT2 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
B
A
A
B
YC6 1 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DPILSW

Connected to 2 NC - - Not used
DP interlock
3 R24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from DPILSW
switch.
YC7 1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DPFM1

Connected to 2 FAN_REM1 O 0/24 V DC DPFM1: On/Off
DP fan
motor1.
YC8 1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DPFM2

Connected to 2 FAN_REM2 O 0/24 V DC DPFM2: On/Off
DP fan
motor2.
2-3-4
3P2

YC10 1 CIS_TMG_S I 0/3.3 V DC DPCS: On/Off
W
Connected to 2 SHD_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
DP SHD 3 SHD_SO O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
PWB.
4 SHD_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC Select signal
5 SHD_PAGES O 0/3.3 V DC Pageset signal
T
6 RESETN O 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
7 SHD_OVMO I 0/3.3 V DC OVMON signal
N
8 SHD_SI I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
9 SHD_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal
10 NC - - Not used
11 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to SHDPWB
12 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to SHDRWB
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground
1 CNVY4_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal

YC14
2B
DP convey- 2 CNVY3_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
ing motor, DP 2A
eject motor.
1B
1A
5 RVRS4_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPEM drive control signal
1B
1A
2A
2B
2-3-5
3P2
2-3-2 DP SHD PWB
[ Component side ] [ Solder side ]
A40
B40
YC2
A1 B1
1
2 1 YC4
3
YC1
14 13 YC3
7 1
Figure 2-3-2 DP SHD PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-6
3P2

YC1 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
DP main
3 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from DPMPWB
PWB.
4 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from DPMPWB
5 NC - - Not used
6 CPU_SRDY O 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal
7 CPU_SO O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
8 CPU_OVM O 0/3.3 V DC OVM signal
9 RESETN I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
10 CPU_PAGES I 0/3.3 V DC Pageset signal
T
11 CPU_SEL I 0/3.3 V DC Select signal
12 CPU_SI I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
13 CPU_SCLK I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
14 CIS_TMG_S O 0/3.3 V DC DPCS: On/Off
W
YC2 A1 GND - - Ground

Connected to A2 CK1 O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
CIS.
A3 GND - - Ground
A4 ST1 O 0/3.3 V DC ST1 signal
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 MODE O 0/3.3 V DC MODE signal
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 VREF O 0/1.1 V DC 1.1 V DC power output to VREF
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 GND - - Ground
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 LED4R_C O 0/6 V DC LED control signal
A13 LED4G_C O 0/6 V DC LED control signal
A14 LED4B_C O 0/6 V DC LED control signal
A15 LED4_A O 0/6 V DC LED control signal
2-3-7
3P2

YC2 A21 LED2G_C O 0/6 V DC LED control signal
Connected to A22 LED2B_C O 0/6 V DC LED control signal
CIS.
A28 GND - - Ground
A29 GND - - Ground
A30 GND - - Ground
A31 GND - - Ground
A32 GND - - Ground
A33 GND - - Ground
A34 GND - - Ground
A35 GND - - Ground
A36 GND - - Ground
A37 3.3V_CIS O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to CIS
A40 GND - - Ground
B1 GND - - Ground
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 OS_1 I Analog Data signal
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 OS2 I Analog Data signal
B6 GND - - Ground
B8 GND - - Ground
B10 GND - - Ground
B12 GND - - Ground
B14 GND - - Ground
B16 GND - - Ground
2-3-8
3P2

YC2 B18 GND - - Ground
Connected to B19 OS9 I Analog Data signal
CIS.
B20 GND - - Ground
B22 GND - - Ground
B24 GND - - Ground
B26 GND - - Ground
B28 GND - - Ground
B30 GND - - Ground
B32 GND - - Ground
B34 GND - - Ground
B36 GND - - Ground
B38 GND - - Ground
B39 GND - - Ground
B40 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 HTPDN I 0/3.3 V DC HTPDN signal
DP relay
3 LOCKN I 0/3.3 V DC LOCKN signal
PWB.
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
6 TX0P O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 CIS_TMG_S I 0/3.3 V DC DPCS: On/Off
DP CIS sen- W
sor.
3 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPCS
2-3-9
3P2
2-3-10
3P2
2-4-1 Appendixes
2-4 Appendixes
(1) List of maintenance parts

Maintenance part name Alternative
Part No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list part No.
DP paper feed belt BELT PF 303LL07531 3LL07531
DP forwarding pulley PULLEY LF 303M407480 3M407480
DP separation pulley PULLEY SEPARATION 303LL07190 3LL07190
DP original sensor PARATS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW94040 3NW94040
DP registration roller PARTS ROLLER REGISTRATION
303M494070 3M494070
SP
DP registration pulley PULLEY,REGISTRATION BK 303M424300 3M424300
DP registration pulley PULLEY REG B BK 303M424310 3M424310
DP conveying roller left PARATS ROLLER CONVEING LEFT 303M494090 3M494090
Reading pulley PULLEY GUIDE READING 303LL24190 3LL24190
DP conveying roller right PARATS ROLLER CONVEING
303M494100 3M494100
RIGHT SP
DP conveying roller upper PARATS ROLLER CONVEING
303M494080 3M494080
UPPER SP
DP eject roller PARTS ROLLER EJECT SP 303M494110 3M494110
Reading guide GUIDE READING 303M424251 3M424251
DP CIS sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW94060 3NW94060
DP timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW94060 3NW94060
DP eject sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW94060 3NW94060
DP CIS roller PARTS ROLLER CIS SP 303M494060 3M494060
CIS PARTS SENSER A3 COLOR CIS(C)
303M494050 3M494050
SP
DP original length switch PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW94050 3NW94050
Original mat PARTS MAT ASSY 303LL94031 3LL94031
2-4-1
3P2
(2) Periodic maintenance procedures

300K/600K/
Maintenance User
Section 900K/1200K/ Points and cautions Page
part/location call
1500K
Test copy Perform at the maxi- Test Test
and test mum copy size copy copy
300K/600K/
Maintenance User
part/location call
1500K
Original DP paper feed belt Clean Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-2
feed sec- Replace after feeding 300,000 sheets.
tion DP forwarding pulley Clean Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-2
Replace after feeding 300,000 sheets.
DP separation pulley Clean Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-6
Replace after feeding 300,000 sheets.
DP original sensor Clean Clean Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
300K/600K/
Maintenance User
part/location call
1500K
Original DP registration roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
convey-
DP registration pul- Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
ing sec-
ley
tion
DP registration pul- Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
ley
DP conveying roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
left
Reading pulley Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP conveying roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
right
2-4-2
3P2
300K/600K/
Maintenance User
part/location call
1500K
Original DP conveying roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
convey- upper
ing sec- DP eject roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
tion
Reading guide Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP CIS sensor Clean Clean Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
DP timing sensor Clean Clean Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
DP eject sensor Clean Clean Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
300K/600K/
Maintenance User
part/location call
1500K
Cis DP CIS roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
CIS Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
300K/600K/
Maintenance User
part/location call
1500K
Original DP original length Clean Clean Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
table switch
300K/600K/
Maintenance User
part/location call
1500K
Covers Covers Clean Clean Clean with alcohol.
Original mat Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
300K/600K/
Maintenance User
part/location call
1500K
Other Image quality Check Check Adjust
Adjust
2-4-3
YC10 YC1 CISPWB
DPMPWB CIS_TMG_SW 1 1 14 14 CIS_TMG_SW DPSPWB
ISCPWB SHD_CLK 2 2 13 13 CPU_SCLK
SHD_SO 3 3 12 12 CPU_SI
YC12 YC1 SHD_SEL 4 4 11 11 CPU_SEL YC2
GND 1 1 1 1 FG SHD_PAGEST 5 5 10 10 CPU_PAGEST GND A1 1 1 A1 GND
DP_PAGEST 2 2 2 2 ENG_PAGEST RESETN 6 6 9 9 RESETN CK1 A2 2 2 A2 CK
DP_RDY 3 3 3 3 ENG_RDY SHD_OVMON 7 7 8 8 CPU_OVM GND A3 3 3 A3 GND
DP_SEL 4 4 4 4 ENG_SEL SHD_SI 8 8 7 7 CPU_SO ST1 A4 4 4 A4 SP
DP_CLK 5 5 5 5 ENG_CLK SHD_RDY 9 9 6 6 CPU_SRDY GND A5 5 5 A5 GND
DP_SO 6 6 6 6 ENG_SI NC 10 10 5 5 NC MODE A6 6 6 A6 MODE
DP_SI 7 7 7 7 ENG_SO 24V 11 11 4 4 24V GND A7 7 7 A7 GND
DP_OPEN 8 8 8 8 DP_OPEN 24V 12 12 3 3 24V VREF A8 8 8 A8 VREF
RESERVE 9 9 9 9 NC(GND) GND 13 13 2 2 GND GND A9 9 9 A9 GND
GND 10 10 10 10 GND GND 14 14 1 1 GND GND A10 10 10 A10 GND
GND 11 11 11 11 GND GND A11 11 11 A11 GND
GND 12 12 12 12 GND LED4R_C A12 12 12 A12 LED4_R
RESERVE 13 13 13 13 NC(GND) LED4G_C A13 13 13 A13 LED4_G
24V 14 14 14 14 24V YC2 YC3 LED4B_C A14 14 14 A14 LED4_B
24V 15 15 15 15 24V GND 1 1 1 1 GND LED4_A A15 15 15 A15 VLED4
(3) Wiring diagram
24V 16 16 16 16 24V HTPDN 2 2 2 2 HTPDN LED1_A A16 16 16 A16 VLED1

LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN LED1R_C A17 17 17 A17 LED1_R
DPRPWB GND 4 4 4 4 GND LED1G_C A18 18 18 A18 LED1_G
Rx0N 5 5 5 5 Tx0N LED1B_C A19 19 19 A19 LED1_B
Rx0P 6 6 6 6 Tx0P LED2R_C A20 20 20 A20 LED2_R
GND 7 7 7 7 GND LED2G_C A21 21 21 A21 LED2_G
LED2B_C A22 22 22 A22 LED2_B
LED2_A A23 23 23 A23 VLED2
YC4_A LED3_A A24 24 24 A24 VLED3
ANODE 3 3 A1 A1 ANODE YC4 LED3R_C A25 25 25 A25 LED3_R
DPLS1 GND 2 2 A2 A2 GND 3.3V 1 1 3 3 3.3V LED3G_C A26 26 26 A26 LED3_G
LF_UPSW 1 1 A3 A3 LF_UPSW CIS_TMG_SW 2 2 2 2 CIS_TMG_SW LED3B_C A27 27 27 A27 LED3_B
A4 A4 GND DPCS GND 3 3 1 1 GND GND A28 28 28 A28 GND
A5 A5 FD_SW GND A29 29 29 A29 GND
A6 A6 3.3V GND A30 30 30 A30 GND
GND 3 3 A7 A7 NC GND A31 31 31 A31 GND
FD_SW 2 2 A8 A8 NC
YC2
DPFS 3.3V 1 1 4 4 3.3V GND A32 32 32 A32 GND
3.3V 1 1 A9 A9 NC GND A33 33 33 A33 GND
GND 2 2 3 3 GND
A10 A10 ANODE GND A34 34 34 A34 GND
LNG_SW 3 3 2 2 LNG_SW DPOLSW
A11 A11 GND GND A35 35 35 A35 GND
LNG_CLK 4 4 1 1 LNG_CLK
A12 A12 EXIT_SW GND A36 36 36 A36 GND
GND 5 5
A13 A13 NC 3.3V_CIS A37 37 37 A37 3.3V
SET_SW 6 6
3.3V 7 7 3.3V_CIS A38 38 38 A38 3.3V
ANODE 8 8 3 3 GND 3.3V_CIS A39 39 39 A39 3.3V
GND 9 9 2 2 SET_SW GND A40 40 40 A40 GND
ANODE 3 3 1 9 DPOS GND B1 41 41 B1 GND
LF_DNSW 10 10 1 1 3.3V
GND 2 2 2 Relay 8 GND B2 42 42 B2 GND
DPES WIDE3 11 11
EXIT_SW 1 1 3 7 OS_1 B3 43 43 B3 OS1
WIDE2 12 12
GND 13 13 GND B4 44 44 B4 GND
WIDE1 14 14 3 3 ANODE OS2 B5 45 45 B5 OS2
YC4_B GND B6 46 46 B6 GND
2-4-4
2 2 GND
B1 B1 NC DPLS2 OS3 B7 47 47 B7 OS3
1 1 LF_DNSW
LED_PW 2 2 1 2 B2 B2 LED_PW GND B8 48 48 B8 GND
Relay
DPLPWB LED_REM 1 1 2 1 B3 B3 LED_REM OS4 B9 49 49 B9 OS4
B4 B4 GND GND B10 50 50 B10 GND
B5 B5 GND OS5 B11 51 51 B11 OS5
4 4 WIDE3
B6 B6 CCD_TMG_SW GND B12 52 52 B12 GND
3 3 WIDE2
B7 B7 3.3V OS6 B13 53 53 B13 OS6
2 2 GND DPOWSW
GND 3 3 4 6 B8 B8 ANODE GND B14 54 54 B14 GND
1 1 WIDE1
DPTS CCD_TMG_SW 2 2 5 Relay 5 B9 B9 GND OS7 B15 55 55 B15 OS7
3.3V 1 1 6 4 B10 B10 DP_OPEN GND B16 56 56 B16 GND
B11 B11 ANODE OS8 B17 57 57 B17 OS8
B12 B12 GND YC5 2 2 NC GND B18 58 58 B18 GND
B13 B13 SKEW_SW FEED3_OUT2B 1 1 6 6 B/ OS9 B19 59 59 B19 OS9
ANODE 3 3 7 3 FEED1_OUT2A 2 2 4 4 B GND B20 60 60 B20 GND
DPOCSW GND 2 2 8 Relay 2 FEED2_OUT1A 3 3 1 1 A DPOFM OS10 B21 61 61 B21 OS10
DP_OPEN 1 1 9 1 FEED4_OUT1B 4 4 3 3 A/ GND B22 62 62 B22 GND
RGST3_OUT2B 5 5 5 5 NC OS11 B23 63 63 B23 OS11
RGST1_OUT2A 6 6 GND B24 64 64 B24 GND
RGST2_OUT1A 7 7 OS12 B25 65 65 B25 OS12
ANODE 3 3 RGST4_OUT1B 8 8 2 2 NC GND B26 66 66 B26 GND
DPSS GND 2 2 LIFT3_OUT2B 9 9 6 6 B/ OS13 B27 67 67 B27 OS13
SKEW_SW 1 1 LIFT1_OUT2A 10 10 4 4 B GND B28 68 68 B28 GND
LIFT2_OUT1A 11 11 1 1 A DPRM OS14 B29 69 69 B29 OS14
LIFT4_OUT1B 12 12 3 3 A/ GND B30 70 70 B30 GND
5 5 NC OS15 B31 71 71 B31 OS15
GND B32 72 72 B32 GND
OS16 B33 73 73 B33 OS16
4 4 B3 GND B34 74 74 B34 GND
YC6 2 2 B1 OS17 B35 75 75 B35 OS17
COM 1 1 1 24V 1 1 A1 DPLM GND B36 76 76 B36 GND
DPILSW NO 2 2 2 NC 3 3 A3 OS18 B37 77 77 B37 OS18
3 3 R24V GND B38 78 78 B38 GND
GND B39 79 79 B39 GND
YC7 YC14 2 2 NC GND B40 80 80 B40 GND
2 1 1 1 R24V CNVY4_OUT2B 1 1 6 6 B/
Relay CNVY3_OUT2A 2 2 4 4 B
DPFM1 1 2 2 2 FAN_REM1
CNVY2_OUT1B 3 3 3 3 A/ DPOCM
CNVY1_OUT1A 4 4 1 1 A
RVRS4_OUT1B 5 5 5 5 NC
YC8 RVRS2_OUT1A 6 6
2 1 1 1 R24V RVRS1_OUT2A 7 7
Relay
DPFM2 1 2 2 2 FAN_REM2 RVRS3_OUT2B 8 8 1 1 NC
2 2 A/
4 4 A
5 5 B DPSBM
3 3 B/
6 6 NC
3P2
1-1 INSTALLATION GUIDE
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR

DOCUMENT PROCESSOR
A B
CODE No.
CODE No.
1102L6
1102N4 **** 1102NL
****
1102N5 **** 1102P8
****
1102N6 ****
1102N9 **** CODE No.
1102NA ****
1102NB **** 1102NP
****
****
English
Check “CODE No.” printed in the rating label.
A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
For installation with a MFP(A), see Page 1 to Page 12,Page 28 to Page 46.
For installation with a MFP(B), see Page 13 to Page 46.
Français
1.
Français
Cochez la case "CODE No." imprimé sur l'étiquette signalétique.
Une procédure différente est requise selon le produit qui est installé avec cette unité.Chaque procédure est décrite dans les pages suivantes.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(A), voir Page 1 à Page 12,Page 28 à Page 46.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(B), voir Page 13 à Page 46.
1.
Español
Revise "CODE No." impreso en la etiqueta de clasificación.
El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes páginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalación con un MFP(A), consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 12,páginas de la 28 a la 46.
Para la instalación con un MFP(B), consulte las páginas de la 13 a la 46.
1.
Deutsch
Deutsch
Prüfen Sie „Code No.“ auf dem Typenschild.
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erläutert.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(A) siehe Seiten 1 bis 12,Seiten 28 bis 46.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(B) siehe Seiten 13 bis 46.
1.
Italiano
Italiano
Controllare "CODE No." stampato sull' etichetta.
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui è installata l'unità.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(A), vedere le pagine da 1 a 12,pagine da 28 a 46.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(B), vedere le pagine da 13 a 46.
简体中文
1.
请确认印制在铭牌上的 “ 产品编号 ”。
根据安装对象，安装步骤略有不同。各个步骤记载在下面的页面。
安装到 MFP(A) 上时，请参见 P1-P12,P28-P46。
安装到 MFP(B) 上时，请参见 P13-P46。
1.한국어
래이팅 라벨에 인쇄된 'CODE No.' 을 확인하십시오 .
이 장치에 설치되는 제품에 따라 절차가 다릅니다 . 다음 페이지에서 각 절차를 설명합니다 .
MFP(A) 에 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~12 페이지 ,28 페이지 ~46 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
MFP(B) 에 설치하는 경우 13 페이지 ~46 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
1.日本語
定格板に印字されている ’CODE No.’ を確認してください。
装着する対象によって、取付手順は異なります。それぞれ、以下のページに記載しています。
MFP(A) に設置する場合；1 ページ～ 12 ページ、 28 ページ～ 46 ページ
MFP(B) に設置する場合；13 ページ～ 46 ページ
B F
DP-772 A
K*
G(M4x14)(8)
C*
K**
E-1 J(M3x8)
D E-2
M N(M3x8) L
A C H I
D. Angle control fitting............................................... 1 J. M3 × 8 screw BLACK*1 ......................................... 1

English
E-1.DP cable cover1 ................................................. 1 K. Label “Operation procedure” ................................1
Supplied parts E-2.DP cable cover2 ................................................. 1 *: for metric specification
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 F. Pin ........................................................................ 1 **: for inch specification
B. Original mat.......................................................... 1 G. M4 × 14TP screw ................................................. 8 L. Caution label “Original face up!”...........................1
C. Fixing fitting (width: 38.5 mm) ..........2 (DP-770(B)) H. Left hinge cover*1 .................................................. 1 M. DP relay PWB*1 .................................................... 1
1 (DP-772) I. Right hinge cover*1 ............................................... 1 N. M3 × 8 screw*1 ...................................................... 2
C*. Fixing fitting (width: 45 mm)*1 .............................. 1 *1: DP-772 only
D. Fixation d’angle .................................................... 1 K. Étiquette relative à la procédure d’utilisation........ 1

Français
E-1.Couvercle du câble du DP1................................ 1 * : pour des spécifications métriques
Pièces fournies E-2.Couvercle du câble du DP2................................ 1 ** : pour des spécifications anglo-saxonnes
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 F. Goupille ................................................................ 1 L. Étiquette d’avertissement relative à l’orientation
B. Plaque d’original .................................................. 1 G. Vis TP M4 × 14..................................................... 8 vers le haut de la face de l’original ......................1
C. Fixation (largeur: 38,5 mm).................. 2 (DP-770(B)) H. Couvercle de charnière gauche*1 ......................... 1 M. Carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP*1 .................1
1 (DP-772) I. Couvercle de charnière droite*1 ............................ 1 N. Vis M3 × 8*1 ......................................................... 2
C.*Fixation (largeur: 45 mm)*1 ................................... 1 J. Vis M3 × 8 NOIRE*1 .............................................. 1 *1: DP-772 uniquement
C*.Herraje de fijación (anchura: 45 mm)*1 ................. 1 J. Tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO*1 ......................................1

Español
D. Herraje de control de ángulo................................ 1 K. Etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” ..................... 1
Partes suministradas E-1.Cubierta del cable del DP1................................. 1 *: para especificaciones en el sistema métrico
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.Cubierta del cable del DP2................................. 1 **: para especificaciones en el sistema de pulgadas
B. Alfombrilla para originales.................................... 1 F. Pasador................................................................ 1 L. Etiqueta de precaución “Original cara arriba” ......1
C. Herraje de fijación (anchura: 38,5 mm) G. Tornillo TP M4 × 14 .............................................. 8 M. PWB del relé del DP*1...........................................1
.........................................................2 (DP-770(B)) H. Cubierta de la bisagra izquierda*1 ........................ 1 N. Tornillo M3 × 8*1 .................................................... 2
1(DP-772) I. Cubierta de la bisagra derecha*1 .......................... 1 *1: DP-772 solamente
C*.Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 45 mm)*1.............. 1 J. M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ*1 ............................. 1

Deutsch
D. Winkeleinstellbefestigung..................................... 1 K. Schild “Funktionsanweisung” ..............................1
Enthaltene Teile E-1.DP-Kabelabdeckung1......................................... 1 *: für metrische Angaben
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.DP-Kabelabdeckung2......................................... 1 **: für Angaben in Zoll
B. Originalmatte........................................................ 1 F. Stift ....................................................................... 1 L. Warnschild “Originalschriftseite nach oben” ........ 1
C. Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 38,5 mm) G. M4 × 14TP Schraube ........................................... 8 M. DP-Verbindungsplatine *1 ..................................... 1
................................................................... 2(DP-770(B)) H. Linke Scharnierabdeckung*1................................. 1 N. M3 × 8 Schraube*1 ................................................2
1 (DP-772) I. Rechte Scharnierabdeckung*1 .............................. 1 *1: nur DP-772
C*. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 45 mm)*1 ...... 1 J. Vite M3 × 8 NERA*1 .............................................. 1

Italiano
D. Accessorio di regolazione angolare ..................... 1 K. Etichetta “Procedura di funzionamento” ..............1
Parti fornite E-1.Coperchio del cavo DP1..................................... 1 *: per specifiche in unità del sistema metrico
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.Coperchio del cavo DP2..................................... 1 **: per specifiche in pollici
B. Tappetino originale ............................................... 1 F. Perno.................................................................... 1 L. Etichetta di avvertimento “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” ... 1
C. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 38,5 mm) G. Vite M4 × 14TP .................................................... 8 M. Scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP*1 ...1
................................................................... 2(DP-770(B)) H. Coperchio cerniera sinistra*1 ................................ 1 N. Vite M3 × 8*1 ......................................................... 2
1 (DP-772) I. Coperchio cerniera destra*1 .................................. 1 *1: Solo DP-772
简体中文 C*.固定工具 ( 宽 45mm) *1 ..................1 I. 右部铰链盖板 *1 ........................1

D. 角度限制工具 .........................1 J. M3×8 螺丝 BLACK*1 .....................1
附属品 E-1.DP 电缆盖板 1 ....................... 1 M. DP 中继板 *1 ...........................1
A. DP................................... 1 E-2.DP 电缆盖板 2 ....................... 1 N. M3×8 螺丝 *1 ..........................2
B. 原稿垫............................... 1 F. 销 ...................................1 *1: 仅限 DP-772
C. 固定工具 ( 宽 38.5mm) ...... 2(DP-770(B)) G. M4×14TP 螺丝 .........................8 (K) 和 (L) 并非附属品。
1(DP-772) H. 左部铰链盖板 *1 ........................1
한국어 C*.고정쇠 (45mm 폭 ) *1 ................................1 I. 힌지커버 우 *1 ......................................... 1

D. 각도 고정쇠 ........................................... 1 J. 나사 M3×8BLACK*1 ................................ 1
동봉품 E-1.DP 케이블커버 1................................... 1 M. DP 중계기판 *1 ....................................... 1
A. DP........................................................ 1 E-2.DP 케이블커버 2................................... 1 N. 나사 M3×8*1 .......................................... 2
B. 원고매트................................................ 1 F. 핀 ........................................................ 1 *1: DP-772 만
C. 고정쇠 (38.5mm 폭 ) .............. 2(DP-770(B)) G. 나사 M4×14TP ...................................... 8 （K）（L）는 동봉되어 있지 않습니다 .
1(DP-772) H. 힌지커버 좌 *1 ..........................................1
日本語 C*.固定金具 (45mm 幅 )*1 ...................1 I. 右ヒンジカバー*1 ......................1

D. 角度規制金具 ........................ 1 J. ビス M3×8BLACK*1 ......................1
同梱品 E-1.DP ケーブルカバー1 .................. 1 M. DP 中継基板 *1 ........................ 1
A. DP.................................. 1 E-2.DP ケーブルカバー2 .................. 1 N. ビス M3×8*1 .......................... 2
B. 原稿マット........................... 1 F. ピン ................................ 1 *1:DP-772 のみ
C. 固定金具 (38.5mm 幅 ) ...... 2(DP-770(B)) G. ビス M4×14TP ........................ 8 (K)(L) は、同梱されていない。
1(DP-772) H. 左ヒンジカバー*1 ......................1
1
G(M4x14)
A C
G(M4x14)
NOTICE Procedure Attach the fixing fitting (DP-770(B))

Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning Before starting installation, be sure to turn the 1.Align projections (1) of each fixing fitting (C)
materials from the parts supplied. main power switch of the machine off, and with holes (2) on the MFP and insert the fix-
The illustrations of the DP in the Installation unplug the power plug from the wall outlet. ing fittings (C) into the MFP.
Guide are for DP-772. 2.Secure each fixing fitting (C) with two M4 x
14TP screws (G).
REMARQUE Procédure Mettre en place la fixation (DP-770(B))

Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé- Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de 1.Aligner les saillies (1) de chacune des
sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des mettre la machine hors tension et de pièces de fixation (C) avec les trous (2) sur
pièces fournies. débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise le MFP et insérer ces pièces (C) dans le
Les schémas du DP dans le Guide d''installation murale. MFP.
concernent le DP-772. 2.Fixer chacune des pièces de fixation (C)
avec deux vis M4 x 14TP (G).
AVISO Procedimiento Monte el herraje de fijación (DP-770(B))

Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate- Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de 1.Alinee las salientes (1) de cada herraje de
rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas. apagar el interruptor de encendido de la fijación (C) con los orificios (2) del MFP e
Las ilustraciones del DP en la Guía de insta- máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación inserte los herrajes de fijación (C) en el MFP.
lación corresponden al DP-772. de la toma de pared. 2.Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación
(C) con dos tornillos M4 x 14TP (G).
ANMERKUNG Vorgehensweise Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung (DP-

770(B))
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu-
1.Die Zapfen (1) jeder Befestigungshalterung
und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts
(C) mit den Öffnungen (2) am MFP ausrich-
Teilen entfernt wurden. ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
ten und die Befestigungshalterungen (C) in
Die Abbildungen des DP in der Steckdose gezogen ist. den MFP einsetzen.
Installationsanleitung gelten für Modell DP-772. 2.Jede Befestigungshalterung (C) mit zwei M4
x 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen.
AVVISO Procedura Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio (DP-
770(B))
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
1.Allineare le sporgenze (1) di ogni accessorio
protezione dalle parti fornite. macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
di fissaggio (C) con i fori (2) sull’MFP, ed
Le illustrazioni del DP nella Guida corrente.
inserire gli accessori di fissaggio (C)
all’installazione sono per il modello DP-772. nell’MFP.
2.Bloccare ogni accessorio di fissaggio (C)
con le due viti M4 x 14TP (G).
注意安装步骤安装固定工具（DP-770(B)）
如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插 1.将各固定工具（C）上的突出部分（1）与 MFP
下。座拔下电源插头。上的孔（2）对齐，然后将固定工具（C）插入
安装手册中关于 DP 的图示以 DP-772 为例。 MFP 中。
2.用两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝（G）固定各固定工具
（C）。
주의 설치순서 고정쇠의 부착（DP-770(B)）

동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경 설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 1.고정쇠 (C) 의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 의 구멍 (2)
우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 . 위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리 을 맞추고 MFP 에 고정쇠 (C) 를 꽂습니다 .
설치순서에 기재되어 있는 DP 일러스트는 DP- 하십시오 . 2.나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 2 개의 고정쇠
772 입니다 . (C) 를 고정합니다 .
注意取付手順固定金具の取り付け（DP-770(B)）
同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機 1.固定金具 (C) の突起 (1) と MFP の穴 (2) を
は必ず取り外すこと。械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ合わせ、MFP に固定金具 (C) を差し込む。
設置手順書に記載している DP のイラストは、と。 2.ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で 2 つの固定金具
DP-772 です。 (C) を固定する。
2
G(M4x14)
C* G(M4x14) A
G(M4x14) F
C G(M4x14)
C (C*)
A
2
C A
4
2
C (C*)
1 3
1 5
Attach the fixing fitting (DP-772) Install the DP 5.Install DP (A) onto the MFP securely with pin
1.Align the projections (1) on the right fixing fit- 3.Align hinge hole (3) of DP (A) with pin (4) of (F) and two M4 × 14TP screws (G).
ting (C) and on the wider left fixing fitting (C*) fixing fitting (C), place DP (A) on the MFP.
with the respective holes (2) in the MFP and 4.Slide the DP (A) toward the front side and
then insert the fixing fittings into the MFP. engage hinges into hooks (5) on fixing fit-
2.Secure each of the fixing fittings (C) (C*) tings (C).
with 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G).
Mettre en place la fixation (DP-772) Installer le DP 5.Installer le DP (A) sur le MFP en le fixant à
1.Aligner les saillies (1) de la fixation droite (C) 3.Aligner le trou de la charnière (3) du DP (A) l’aide de la goupille (F) et des deux vis TP
et de la fixation gauche plus large (C*) avec sur la goupille (4) de la fixation (C) et placer M4 × 14 (G).
les trous correspondants (2) du MFP et le DP (A) sur le MFP.
insérer les fixations dans le MFP. 4.Faire glisser le DP (A) vers l'avant et
2.Fixer chaque des fixations (C) (C*) avec 2 engager les charnières dans les crochets (5)
vis TP M4 × 14 (G). sur les pièces de fixation (C).
Monte el herraje de fijación (DP-772) Instale el DP 5.Instale el DP (A) firmemente en el MFP con
1. Alinee los salientes (1) del herraje de fijación dere- 3.Alinee el orificio de bisagra (3) del DP (A) el pasador (F) y dos tornillos TP M4 × 14
cho (C) y del herraje de fijación izquierdo más con el pasador (4) del herraje de fijación (C) (G).
ancho (C*) con los orificios correspondientes (2)
y coloque el DP (A) en el MFP.
del MFP y, después, inserte los herrajes de fijación
en el MFP. 4.Deslice el DP (A) hacia el frente y enganche
2. Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación (C) las bisagras en los ganchos (5) de los her-
(C*) con 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G). rajes de fijación (C).
Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung (DP-772) Installieren des DP 5.DP (A) sicher mit einem Stift (F) und zwei M4
1. Die Zapfen (1) an der rechten Befestigungshalter- 3.Scharnierloch (3) des DP (A) mit Stift (4) der × 14TP Schrauben (G) am MFP befestigen.
ung (C) und an der breiteren Befestigungshalter-
Befestigungshalterung (C) ausrichten, und
ung (C*) mit den entsprechenden Öffnungen (2)
am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterun- DP (A) auf den MFP stellen.
gen in den MFP einsetzen. 4.Den DP (A) nach vorne hin verschieben und
2. Die Befestigungshalterungen (C) (C*) mit den 2 M4 die Scharniere in die Haken (5) an den Bef-
× 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen. estigungshalterungen (C) einsetzen.
Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio (DP-772) Montaggio del DP 5.Montare il DP (A) sull’MFP assicurandolo
1. Allineare le sporgenze (1) sull'accessorio di fissag- 3.Allineare il foro della cerniera (3) del DP (A) con il perno (F) e due viti M4 × 14TP (G).
gio destro (C) e sull'accessorio di fissaggio sinistro con il perno (4) dell’accessorio di fissaggio
più largo (C*) con i rispettivi fori (2) nell'MFP, e (C), quindi posizionare il DP (A) sull’MFP.
quindi inserire gli accessori di fissaggio nell'MFP.
4.Far scorrere il DP (A) verso il lato anteriore
2. Fissare ciascuno degli accessori di fissaggio (C)
(C*) con 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G).
ed inserire le cerniere nei ganci (5) sugli
accessori di fissaggio (C).
安装固定工具 (DP-772) 安装 DP 5.用销（F）和两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝（G）将 DP

1.将固定工具 (C) 从右侧、宽幅固定夹具 (C*) 3.将 DP（A）的铰链孔（3）对准固定工具（C）的（A）安装到 MFP 上。
从左侧将各自的突出部分 (1) 与 MFP 的孔销（4），并将 DP（A）放在 MFP 上。
(2) 对齐并插入到 MFP 中。 4.朝前侧滑动 DP（A），然后将铰链与固定工具
2.使用各 2 颗 M4×14 螺丝 TP(G) 来固定固定工（C）上的卡扣（5）相啮合。
具 (C) 与固定工具 (C*)
고정쇠의 부착（DP-772） DP 부착 5.핀 (F) 1 개와 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로

1.우측에 고정쇠 (C), 좌측에 광폭 고정쇠 (C*) 3.DP(A) 의 힌지부 구멍 (3) 과 고정쇠 (C) 핀 DP(A) 를 MFP 에 고정합니다 .
각각의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 구멍 (2) 을 맞추고 (4) 을 맞추고 MFP 에 DP(A) 를 올립니다 .
MFP 에 꽂습니다 . 4.DP(A) 를 밀어 힌지부를 고정쇠 (C) 의 걸쇠
2.나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 고정쇠 (C) 와 (5) 에 끼웁니다 .
고정쇠 (C*) 를 고정합니다 .
固定金具の取り付け（DP-772） DP の取り付け 5.ピン (F)1 本とビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で

1.右側に固定金具 (C)、左側に幅広の固定金具 3.DP(A) のヒンジ部の穴 (3) と固定金具 (C) DP(A) を MFP に固定する。
(C*) のそれぞれの突起 (1) と MFP の穴 (2) のピン (4) を合わせ、MFP に DP(A) を乗せ
を合わせ、MFP に差し込む。る。
2.ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で固定金具 (C) と 4.DP(A) を手前にスライドさせ、ヒンジ部を固
固定金具 (C*) を固定する。定金具 (C) の引っ掛け部 (5) にはめ込む。
3
6
A A
8
12
9
11
G(M4x14)
D
10
7
Install the angle control fitting To adjust DP open-close angle 30 degrees 9.Remove stop ring (11) of angle control fitting
To adjust DP open-close angle 60 degrees 7.Open the upper cover (6) of the DP (A). (D) that has been installed in step 6 to
6.Install angle control fitting (D) at the rear side 8.Remove the four screws (7) and (8). remove shaft (12).
of the right hinge with two M4 × 14TP screws Remove the strap (9) from the rear cover
(G). (10). Remove the rear cover (10) of the DP
(A).
Installer la fixation d’angle Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture 9.Retirer l’anneau de butée (11) de la fixation
Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture du DP de 30 degrés d’angle (D) installée à l’étape 6 pour enlever
du DP de 60 degrés 7.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (6) du DP (A). la tige (12).
6.Placer la fixation d’angle (D) à l’arrière de la 8.Retirer les quatre vis (7) et (8).Retirer la
charnière droite à l’aide des deux vis TP M4 courroie (9) du couvercle arrière (10).Retirer
× 14 (G). la couvercle arrière (10) du DP (A).
Instale el herraje de control de ángulo Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 30 9.Retire el anillo de retención (11) del herraje
Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 60 grados de control de ángulo (D) que se instaló en el
grados 7.Abra la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A). paso 6 para retirar el eje (12).
6.Instale el herraje de control de ángulo (D) en 8.Quite los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8).Retire la
el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha con correa (9) de la cubierta posterior (10).Quite
dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G). la cubierta posterior (10) del DP (A).
Installieren der Winkeleinstellbefestigung Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswin- 9.Anschlagring (11) von der Winkeleinstellbef-
Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswin- kels des DP um 30 Grad estigung (D) abnehmen, die in Schritt 6 mon-
kels des DP um 60 Grad 7. Die obere Abdeckung (6) des DP (A) öffnen. tiert wurde, um die Welle (12) zu entfernen.
6.Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) an der Rück- 8.Entfernen Sie die vier Schrauben (7) und
seite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 × (8).Entfernen Sie den Riemen (9) der hin-
14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen. teren Abdeckung (10).Entfernen Sie die hin-
tere Abdeckung (10) des DP (A).
Montaggio dell’accessorio di regolazione Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura 9.Rimuovere l’anello di bloccaggio (11)
angolare del DP a 30 gradi dell’accessorio di regolazione angolare (D)
Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura 7.Aprire il pannello superiore (6) del DP (A). che era stato installato al Punto 6 per
del DP a 60 gradi 8.Togliere le quattro viti (7) e (8).Rimuovere la rimuovere l’albero (12).
6.Montare l’accessorio di regolazione ango- cinghietta (9) dal coperchio posteriore
lare (D) sul lato posteriore della cerniera (10).Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (10)
destra con due viti M4 × 14TP (G). del DP (A).
安装角度限制工具若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 30 度 9.拆下在第 6 步中安装的角度控制配件（D）的

若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 60 度 7.打开 DP（A）的上盖板（6）。止动环（11），以将轴（12）拆下。
6.在右部铰链的后部使用两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝 8.取下 4 颗螺丝 (7)，(8)。从后盖板 (10) 上取
（G）安装角度限制工具（D）。下塑料片 (9)。取下 DP(A) 的后盖板 (10)。
각도 고정쇠의 부착 DP 개폐 각도를 30 도로 설정하는 경우 9.스텝 6 에서 부착한 각도 고정쇠 (D) 의 스톱

DP 개폐각도를 60 도로 설정하는 경우 7.DP(A) 의 DP 윗커버 (6) 를 엽니다 . 링 (11) 1 개를 제거하고 샤프트 (12) 를 제
6.우 힌지 뒷측에 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로 8.나사 (7), (8) 4 개를 제거합니다 . 스트랩 (9) 거합니다 .
각도 고정쇠 (D) 를 부착합니다 . 를 후면 커버 (10) 에서 제거합니다 .DP(A)
의 후면 커버 (10) 를 제거합니다 .
角度規制金具の取り付け DP 開閉角度を 30 度に設定する場合 9.手順 6 で取り付けた角度規制金具 (D) のス

DP 開閉角度を 60 度に設定する場合 7.DP(A) の DP 上カバー(6) を開く。トップリング (11)1 個を外し、シャフト
6.右ヒンジ後側にビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で角度 8.ビス (7)、(8) 4 本を外す。ストラップ (9) を (12) を取り外す。
規制金具 (D) を取り付ける。後カバー(10) から外す。 DP(A) の後カバー
(10) を取り外す。
4
11 14 A
12
12
14
15
13
10. Insert shaft (12) into the rear side of the right Connect the DP signal line (DP-770(B) only) 14.Remove the DP cable connection cap (15)
hinge. For the DP-772, proceed to step 13 on page 7. from the DP cable connection cover (14).
11. Attach stop ring (11) to the notch of shaft (12) 13.Remove the screw (13) and remove the DP
and secure shaft (12).
cable connection cover (14).
12. Reinstall the rear cover (10) using the four
screws (7) and (8) removed in step 8.Attach the
strap (9) in the rear cover (10).Close the upper
cover (6) of the DP (A).
10. Insérer la tige (12) à l’arrière de la charnière Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP- 14.Déposer le chapeau de la connexion du
droite. 770(B) uniquement) câble du DP (15) du couvercle de la connex-
11. Fixer l’anneau de butée (11) sur l’encoche de la
tige (12) et mettre en place la tige (12). Pour le DP-772, passer à l'étape 13 en page 7. ion du câble du DP (14).
12. Remonter la couvercle arrière (10) à l'aide des 13.Déposer la vis (13) et déposer le couvercle
quatre vis (7) et (8) retirées à l'étape 8.Fixer la de la connexion du câble du DP (14).
courroie (9) dans le couvercle arrière
(10).Refermer le couvercle supérieur (6) du DP
(A).
10. Inserte el eje (12) en el lado trasero de la bis- Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP- 14.Quite la tapa de conexión del cable del DP
agra derecha. 770(B) solamente) (15) de la cubierta de conexión del cable del
11. Fije el anillo de retención (11) a la muesca del Para el DP-772, vaya al paso 13 de la página 7. DP (14)
eje (12) y asegure el eje (12).
13.Quite el tornillo (13) y quite la cubierta de
12. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta posterior (10) con
los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8) que quitó en el paso conexión del cable del DP (14).
8.Coloque la correa (9) de la cubierta posterior
(10).Cierre la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A).
10. Welle (12) in die Rückseite des rechten Scharniers Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur 14.Die Kappe (15) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
einsetzen.
11. Anschlagring (11) an der Wellenkerbe (12) anbrin- DP-770(B)) von der Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelan-
gen und Welle befestigen (12). Beim DP-772 weitergehen zu Schritt 13 auf schlusses abnehmen.
12. Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (10) wieder an. Seite 7.
Benutzen Sie die vier Schrauben (7) und (8) aus 13.Die Schraube (13) entfernen und die
Schritt 8.Befestigen Sie den Riemen (9) der hin- Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
teren Abdeckung (10).Schließen Sie die obere
Abdeckung (6) des DP (A). abnehmen.
10. Inserire l’albero (12) nella parte posteriore della Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP- 14.Rimuovere il cappuccio (15) per la connes-
cerniera destra.
770(B)) sione del cavo DP dal coperchio di connes-
11. Applicare l’anello di bloccaggio (11) nell’incavo
dell’albero (12) e assicurare l’albero (12). Per il DP-772, procedere al passo 13 a pagina sione del cavo DP (14).
12. Rimontare il coperchio posteriore (10) utilizzando 7.
le quattro viti (7) e (8) rimosse al punto 8.Rimon- 13.Rimuovere la vite (13) e quindi rimuovere il
tare la cinghietta (9) sul coperchio posteriore coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP
(10).Chiudere il pannello superiore (6) del DP (A). (14).
10.将轴（12）插入到右部铰链的后部。连接 DP 信号线（仅限 DP-770(B)） 14.从 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14) 上拆下 DP 电缆连接

11.将止动环（11）安装到轴（12）的切口并将轴 DP-772 跳至 P7 的步骤 13。用盖 (15)。
（12）固定。 13.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (13)，拆下 DP 电缆连接盖板
12.使用步骤 8 中取下的 4 颗螺丝 (7)，(8) 来按 (14)。
原样安装后盖板 (10)。把塑料片 (9) 安装到
后盖板 (10)。关闭 DP(A) 的 DP 上盖板 (6)。
10. 우 힌지 뒷측에 샤프트 (12) 를 삽입합니다 . DP 신호선의 접속（DP-770(B) 만） 14.DP 케이블 연결 커버 (14) 에서 DP 케이블
11. 스톱링 (11) 을 샤프트 (12) 의 노치에 부착하고 DP-772 은 P7 의 순서 13 으로 진행 . 연결 캡 (15) 을 제거합니다 .
샤프트 (12) 를 고정합니다 . 13.나사 (13) 1 개를 빼고 DP 케이블 연결 커버
12. 순서 8 에서 제거한 나사 (7),(8) 4 개를 사용하 (14) 를 제거합니다 .
여 후면 커버 (10) 를 원래대로 부착합니다 . 스
트랩 (9) 을 후면 커버 (10) 에 부착합니다
.DP(A) 의 DP 윗 커버 (6) 를 닫습니다 .
10.右ヒンジ後側にシャフト (12) を挿入する。 DP 信号線の接続（DP-770(B) のみ） 14.DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) から DP ケーブ

11.ストップリング (11) をシャフト (12) の溝 DP-772 は P7 の手順 13 へ進む。ル接続用フタ (15) を取り外す。
に取り付け、シャフト (12) を固定する。 13.ビス (13)1 本を外して、DP ケーブル接続カ
12.手順 8 で外したビス (7)、(8) 4 本で後カバー(14) を外す。
バー(10) を元通り取り付ける。ストラップ
(9) を後カバー(10) に取り付ける。DP(A) の
DP 上カバー(6) を閉じる。
5
A 16 14
E-2
E
14
E-1
18
16
13
17
14
15.Pass the DP signal line cable (16) through 16.Pass the DP signal line cable (16) along the 17.Attach the DP cable cover (E) to the DP
the hole in DP cable connection cover (14). groove in the DP cable cover 1 (E-1). Install cable connection cover (14) and install the
Connect the DP signal line connector (17) to the DP cable cover 2 (E-2). DP cable connection cover (14) using the
the connector (18) of the ISC PWB. screw (13) removed in step 13.
Proceed to step 23 on page 10
15.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (16) 16.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (16) 17.Fixer le couvercle du câble du DP (E) sur le
dans le trou du couvercle de connexion du dans la rainure du couvercle 1 du câble DP couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP
câble DP (14).Raccordez le connecteur de (E-1). Installez le couvercle 2 du câble DP (14) et installer le couvercle de la connexion
ligne de signal DP (17) sur le connecteur (E-2). du câble du DP (14) à l'aide de la vis (13)
(18) de l'ISC PWB. déposée à l'étape 13.
Passer à l'étape 23 de la page 10.
15.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP 16.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP 17. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP (E) a la
(16) por el orificio de la cubierta de conexión (16) a lo largo de la ranura de la cubierta de cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (14) e
de cables del DP (14).Conecte el conector cables 1 del DP (E-1).Instale la cubierta de instale la cubierta de conexión del cable del
de línea de señales del DP (17) al conector cables 2 del DP (E-2). DP (14) usando el tornillo (13) quitado en el
(18) de ISC PWB. paso 13.
Vaya al paso 23 de la página 10.
15.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (16) des DP 16.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (16) des DP 17.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) an der Abdeck-
durch die Öffnung der Steckerabdeckung durch die Nut der Steckerabdeckung 1 (E-1) ung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses anbrin-
(14) des DP.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der des DP.Befestigen Sie die Steckerabdeck- gen und die Abdeckung (14) des DP-
Signalleitung (17) des DP mit dem Steck- ung 2 (E-2) des DP. Kabelanschlusses mittels der in Schritt 13
verbinder (18) der ISC-Platine. entfernten Schraube (13) befestigen.
Weitergehen zu Schritt 23 auf Seite 10.
15.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP 16.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP 17..Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP (E) al
(16) nel foro presente sul coperchio del con- (16) lungo la scanalatura sul coperchio del coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (14),
nettore cavo DP (14). Collegare il connettore cavo DP 1 (E-1).Installare il coperchio del e quindi installare il coperchio di connes-
di linea del segnale DP (17) al connettore cavo DP 2 (E-2). sione del cavo DP (14) utilizzando la vite
(18) della scheda ISC PWB. (13) rimossa nel passo 13.
Procedere al passo 23 a pagina 10.
15.将 DP 信号线 (16) 穿过 DP 电缆连接盖板 16.将 DP 信号线 (16) 穿过 DP 电缆盖板 1（E-1） 17.将 DP 电缆盖板 (E) 安装到 DP 电缆连接盖板
（14）的孔。把 DP 信号线的接插件（17）和的槽中。安装 DP 电缆盖板 2（E-2)。 (14) 上，使用步骤 13 中拆下的 1 颗螺丝
ISC 电路板的接插件（18）相连接。 (13) 来安装 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14)。
跳至 P10 的步骤 23。
15.DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (16) 을 DP 케이블 16.DP 케이블 커버 1(E-1) 의 홈을 따라 DP 시 17.DP 케이블 커버 (E) 를 DP 케이블 접속커버
접속커버 (14) 의 구멍으로 통과시킵니다 그널 라인 케이블 (16) 을 통과시킵니다 . DP (14) 에 부착하고 순서 13 에서 제거한 나사
.DP 신호 신호선 커넥터 (17) 를 ISC PWB 의 케이블 커버 2(E-2) 를 설치합니다 . (13) 1 개로 DP 케이블 접속커버 (14) 를 부
커넥터 (18) 에 연결합니다 . 착합니다 .
P10 의 순서 23 로 진행 .
15.DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) の穴に DP 信号 16.DP ケーブルカバー1(E-1) の溝に DP 信号線 17.DP ケーブルカバー(E) を DP ケーブル接続カ
線 (16) を通す。
DP 信号線コネクター(17) を (16) を通す。DP ケーブルカバー2(E-2) を取バー(14) に取り付け、手順 13 で外したビス
ISC 基板のコネクター(18) に接続する。り付ける。 (13)1 本で DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) を取
り付ける。
P10 の手順 23 へ進む。
6
22 A
20
22
35
19
21
Connect the DP signal line (DP-772 only) 14.Remove the screw (21) and remove the DP 15.Remove the DP cable connection cap (35)
13.Remove the 4 screws (19).Remove the DP cable connection cover (22). from the DP cable connection cover (22).
relay PWB cover (20).
Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP-772 14.Déposer la vis (21) et déposer le couvercle 15.Déposer le chapeau de la connexion du
uniquement) de la connexion du câble du DP (22). câble du DP (35) du couvercle de la connex-
13.Retirez les 4 vis (19).Retirer le couvercle du ion du câble du DP (22).
circuit imprimé du relais du DP (20).
Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP-772 14.Quite el tornillo (21) y quite la cubierta de 15.Quite la tapa de conexión del cable del DP
solamente) conexión del cable del DP (22). (35) de la cubierta de conexión del cable del
13.Quite los 4 tornillos (19).Retire la cubierta de DP (22).
PWB del relé del DP (20).
Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur 14.Die Schraube (21) entfernen und die 15.Die Kappe (35) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
DP-772) Abdeckung (22) des DP-Kabelanschlusses von der Abdeckung (22) des DP-Kabelan-
13.Entfernen Sie die 4 Schrauben (19).Ent- abnehmen. schlusses abnehmen.
fernen Sie die Abdeckung (20) der DP-
Verbindungsplatine zum Vorlageneinzug.
Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP- 14.Rimuovere la vite (21) e quindi rimuovere il 15.Rimuovere il cappuccio (35) per la connes-
772) coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP sione del cavo DP dal coperchio di connes-
13.Togliere le 4 viti (19).Rimuovere la scheda a (22). sione del cavo DP (22).
circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (20).
连接 DP 信号线（仅限 DP-772） 14.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (21)，拆下 DP 电缆连接盖板 15.从 DP 电缆连接盖板 (22) 上拆下 DP 电缆连接
13.拆除 4 颗螺丝 (19)。取下 DP 中继板的盖板 (22)。用盖 (35)。
(20)。
DP 시그널 라인 연결 (DP-772 만） 14.나사 (21) 1 개를 제거한 루 DP 케이블 연결 15.DP 케이블 연결 커버 (22) 에서 DP 케이블
13.나사 (19) 4 개를 제거합니다 . 캡 (22) 을 제거합니다 . 연결 캡 (35) 을 제거합니다 .
DP 중계기판 커버 (20) 를 제거합니다 .
DP 信号線の接続（DP-772 のみ） 14.ビス (21)1 本を外して、DP ケーブル接続カ 15.DP ケーブル接続カバー(22) から DP ケーブ
13.ビス (19)4 本を外す。DP 中継基板カバーバー(22) を外すル接続用フタ (35) を取り外す。
7
A 22 N(M3x8)
M
26
30
23
24
25
29 M
16.Pass the DP signal line cable (23) and the Installing the DP relay PWB 18.Secure the DP relay PWB (M). Secure it with
CIS data line cable (24) through the hole in 17.Connect connector (29) on the DP relay the two M3 × 8 screws (N) supplied with the
DP cable connection cover (22).Connect the PWB (M) to connector (30) on the MFP. DP-772.
DP signal line connector (25) to the connec- 　Push the lower part of the DP relay PWB
tor (26) of the ISC PWB. (M) to make sure to connect with connec-
tor (29).
Installation de la carte de circuit imprimé relais

16.Passez le câble de ligne de signal DP (23) et 18.Fixez la DP relay PWB (M). Fixez-la avec les
du DP
le câble de ligne de données CIS (24) dans deux vis M3 × 8 (N) fournies avec le DP-
17. Raccorder le connecteur (29) sur la carte de
le trou du couvercle de connexion du câble 772.
circuit imprimé relais du DP (M) au connecteur
DP (22). Raccordez le connecteur de ligne (30) sur le MFP.
de signal DP (25) sur le connecteur (26) de Appuyer sur la partie inférieure de la carte de
l'ISC PWB. circuit imprimé relais du DP (M) pour s'assurer
qu'elle est bien raccordée au connecteur (29).
16.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP Instalación del PWB del relé del DP 18.Fije el DP relay PWB (M). Fíjelo con los dos
(23) y el cable de línea de datos de CIS (24) 17.Conecte el conector (29) del PWB del relé tornillos M3 × 8 (N) suministrados con DP-
por el orificio de la cubierta de conexión de del DP (M) al conector (30) del MFP. 772.
cables del DP (22). Conecte el conector de Presione la parte inferior de la PWB del
línea de señales del DP (25) al conector (26) relé del DP (M) para asegurarse de que se
de ISC PWB. conecta con el conector (29).
16.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (23) des DP Installieren der DP-Verbindungsplatine 18.Befestigen Sie die DP Verbindungsplatine
und die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die 17. Den Stecker (29) an der DP-Verbindungsplatine (M). Befestigen Sie es mit den beiden M3 ×
Öffnung der Steckerabdeckung (22) des DP. (M) mit dem Stecker (30) am MFP verbinden 8 Schrauben (N), die sich im Lieferumfang
Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung Drücken Sie auf den unteren Teil der DP- des DP-772 befinden.
(25) des DP mit dem Steckverbinder (26) der Verbindungsplatine (M), um sicherzustel-
ISC-Platine. len, dass die Verbindung mit dem Stecker
(29) erfolgt.
16.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di 18.Fissare la scheda DP Relay PWB (M). Fis-
(23) e il cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) nel comunicazione DP sarla con le due viti M3 × 8 (N) fornite con
17. Collegare il connettore (29) sulla scheda a
foro presente sul coperchio del connettore circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (M) al
l'alimentatore DP-772.
del cavo DP (22). Collegare il connettore di connettore (30) sull’MFP.
linea del segnale DP (25) al connettore (26) Spingere la parte inferiore della Scheda a circu-
della scheda ISC PWB. iti stampati di comunicazione DP (M) per assi-
curarsi che venga collegata al connettore (29).
16.将 DP 信号线（23）和 CIS 数据线（24）穿过安装 DP 中继板 18.固定 DP 中继板（M）。使用 DP-772 附带的 2 颗

DP 电缆连接盖板（22）的孔。把 DP 信号线的 17.将 DP 中继板（M）上的接插件（29）连接至 M3X8(N) 螺丝来固定。
接插件（25）和 ISC 电路板的接插件（26）相 MFP 上的接插件（30）。
连接。按压 DP 中继板 (M) 的下部，来确认接插件
（29）已完全连接。
16.DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (23) 과 CIS 데이터 DP 중계기판의 부착 18.DP 중계 PWB (M) 를 고정합니다 . DP-772
라인 케이블 (24) 을 DP 케이블 연결 커버 17.DP 중계기판 (M) 의 커넥터 (29) 를 MFP 의 와 함께 공급된 나사 M3×8(N) 2 개를 사용
(22) 의 구멍에 통과시킵니다 . DP 시그널 라 커넥터 (30) 에 연결합니다 . 하여 고정합니다 .
인 커넥터 (25) 를 ISC PWB 의 커넥터 (26) DP 중계 기판 (M) 의 하부를 눌러 코넥터
에 연결합니다 . (29) 를 확실히 연결합니다 .
16.DP ケーブル接続カバー(22) の穴に DP 信号 DP 中継基板の取り付け 18.DP 中継基板 (M) を固定する。DP-772 に同

線 (23) と CIS データ線
（24）
を通す。
DP 信号 17.DP 中継基板 (M) のコネクター(29) を、MFP 梱のビス M3×8(N)2 本で固定する。
線コネクター(25) を ISC 基板のコネクターのコネクター(30) に接続する。
(26) に接続する。　 DP 中継基板 (M) の下部を押し、コネクター
(29) を確実に接続すること。
8
E-2 A
E-1
24
23
31
24
22
19.Plug the CIS data line (24) into the connetor 20.Pass the DP signal line cable (23) along the groove in the DP cable cover 1 (E-1).Pass the CIS
(31) on the DP relay PWB (M). data line cable (24) along the other groove.Install the DP cable cover 2 (E-2).
NOTICE
To avoid image problems that may be caused when the both of the DP signal line cable (23) and
CIS data line cable (24) were passed through in a same groove, be sure to slip the individual line
in a separate groove as shown in the figure.
19.Enficher le câble de la ligne des données du 20.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (23) dans la rainure du couvercle 1 du câble DP (E-
CIS (24) dans le connecteur (31) de la carte 1).Passez le câble de ligne de données CIS (24) dans l'autre rainure.Installez le couvercle 2 du
de circuit imprimé relais du DP (M). câble DP (E-2).
REMARQUE
Pour éviter les problèmes d'image pouvant être causés lorsque le câble de ligne de signal DP
(23) et le câble de ligne de données CIS (24) ont été passé dans une même rainure, assurez-
vous de glisser chaque ligne dans une rainure à part comme indiqué sur la figure.
19.Enchufe la línea de datos CIS (24) al conec- 20.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP (23) a lo largo de la ranura de la cubierta de cables 1
tor (31) PWB del relé del DP (M). del DP (E-1).Pase el cable de línea de datos de CIS (24) a lo largo de la otra ranura.Instale la
cubierta de cables 2 del DP (E-2).
AVISO
Para evitar posibles problemas de imagen como consecuencia de pasar tanto el cable de línea
de señales del DP (23) como el cable de línea de datos de CIS (24) a lo largo de la misma
ranura, asegúrese de pasar cada una de las líneas por una ranura distinta como se muestra en la
imagen.
19.Die CIS-Datenleitung (24) an den 20.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (23) des DP durch die Nut der Steckerabdeckung 1 (E-1) des DP.
Stecker(31) auf der DP-Verbindungsplatine Verlegen Sie die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die andere Nut.Befestigen Sie die Steckerab-
deckung 2 (E-2) des DP.
(M) anschließen. ANMERKUNG
Um Probleme mit der Bildqualität zu vermeiden, die entstehen können, wenn die Signalleitung
(23) des DP und die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die gleiche Nut geführt werden, stellen Sie
sicher, dass jede Leitung in einer getrennten Nut geführt wird, wie in dem Bild gezeigt.
19.Inserire la linea dati CIS (24) nel connet- 20. Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP (23) lungo la scanalatura sul coperchio del cavo DP 1 (E-
tore(31) sulla scheda a circuiti stampati di 1).Far passare il cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) lungo l'altra scanalatura.Installare il coperchio del cavo
comunicazione DP (M). DP 2 (E-2).
AVVISO
Per evitare i problemi di immagine che si verificano quando il cavo di linea del segnale DP (23) e il
cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) vengono fatti passare nella stessa scanalatura, ricordarsi di far pas-
sare questi due cavi in scanalature separate come indicato in figura.
19.将 CIS 数据线 (24) 连接到 DP 中继电路板 20.将 DP 信号线（23）穿过 DP 电缆盖板 1（E-1) 的槽，再把 CIS 数据线（24）穿过别的槽。安装 DP 电缆
(M) 上的接插件 (31) 上。盖板 2（E-2)。
注意
如将 DP 信号线（23）和 CIS 数据线（24）穿过同一个槽，可能会出现图像异常，因此必须如图所示
分别穿过左右两侧的槽。
19.DP 중계기판 (M) 상의 커넥터 (31) 에 CIS 20.DP 케이블 커버 1(E-1) 의 홈을 따라 DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (23) 을 통과시킵니다 . 다른 홈을
데이터 라인 (24) 을 연결합니다 . 따라 CIS 데이터 라인 케이블 (24) 을 통과시킵니다 .DP 케이블 커버 2(E-2) 를 설치합니다 .
주의
DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (23) 과 CIS 데이터 라인 케이블 (24) 을 같은 홈에 통과시키는 경우 화상
문제가 발생할 수 있으므로 그림과 같이 반드시 선을 따로 넣도록 하십시오 .
19.DP 中継基板 (M) 上のコネクター(31) に CIS 20.DP ケーブルカバー1(E-1) の溝に DP 信号線 (23) を通す。別の溝に CIS データ線（24）を通す。DP
データ線 (24) を接続する。ケーブルカバー2(E-2) を取り付ける。
注意
DP 信号線（23）
と CIS データ線（24）を同じ溝に通すと異常画像が発生する可能性があるため、図
の様に左右の溝に別々に入れること。
9
A A
E
22 B
34
21
21.Attach the DP cable cover (E) to the DP Fasten the original mat.
cable connection cover (22) and install the 23.Place original mat (B) with its Velcro (34) upward over the contact glass.
DP cable connection cover (22) using the Align original mat (B) corner that has 90 degrees of angle with the inner left corner of the
screw (21) removed in step 14. original instruction panel.
22.Install the DP relay PWB cover (20) usingthe 24.Close DP (A) and attach original mat (B) onto it with Velcro.
four screws(19) removed in step 13.
21.Fixer le couvercle du câble du DP (E) sur le Fixer la plaque d’original.

couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP 23.Placer la plaque d’original (B) sur la vitre d’exposition, en orientant les bandes Velcro (34) vers le
(22) et installer le couvercle de la connexion haut.
du câble du DP (22) à l'aide de la vis (21) Aligner le coin du plateau d'original (B) faisant un angle de 90 degrés avec le coin gauche
déposée à l'étape 14.
interne du panneau d'instructions d'original.
22.Installez le couvercle du circuit imprimé du
relais du DP (20) à l'aide des quatre vis (19) 24.Abaisser le DP (A) et y fixer la plaque d’original (B) à l’aide des bandes Velcro.
retirées à l'étape 13.
21. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP (E) a la Fije la alfombrilla para originales.
cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (22) e 23.Coloque la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro (34) hacia arriba sobre el cristal de con-
instale la cubierta de conexión del cable del tacto.
DP (22) usando el tornillo (21) quitado en el Alinee la esquina que tiene un ángulo de 90 grados de la alfombrilla para originales (B)
paso 14.
con la esquina interior izquierda del panel de instrucciones para el original.
22.Instale la cubierta de PWB del relé del DP
24.Cierre el DP (A) y fije la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro.
(20) con los cuatro tornillos (19) que quitó en
el paso 13.
21.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) an der Abdeck- Befestigen der Originalmatte.
ung (22) des DP-Kabelanschlusses anbrin- 23.Die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband (34) nach oben über das Kontaktglas legen.
gen und die Abdeckung (22) des DP- Die Ecke der Originalmatte (B), die einen 90-Grad-Winkel aufweist, mit der linken, inneren
Kabelanschlusses mittels der in Schritt 14 Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten.
entfernten Schraube (21) befestigen. 24.Den DP (A) schließen und die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband auf ihm befestigen.
22.Bringen Sie die Abdeckung (20) der DP-
Verbindungsplatine wieder an. Benutzen Sie
die Schraube (19) aus Schritt 13.
21. .Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP (E) al coper- Fissaggio del tappetino originale.
chio di connessione del cavo DP (22), e quindi 23.Posizionare il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro (34) rivolto verso l’alto sul vetro di appoggio.
installare il coperchio di connessione del cavo Allineare l’angolo di 90 gradi del coprioriginale (B) con l’angolo interno sinistro del pan-
DP (22) utilizzando la vite (21) rimossa nel nello di controllo originale.
passo 14. 24.Chiudere il DP (A) e applicarvi il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro.
22. IInstallare il coperchio della scheda a circuiti
stampati di comunicazione DP (20) utilizzando
le quattro viti (19) rimosse al punto 13.
21.将 DP 电缆盖板 (E) 安装到 DP 电缆连接盖板粘贴原稿垫。
(22) 上，使用步骤 14 中拆下的 1 颗螺丝 23.将原稿垫（B）放置在稿台玻璃上，并使魔术贴（34）向上。
(21) 来安装 DP 电缆连接盖板 (22)。将原稿垫（B）的 90 度角对准原稿指示板的内部左角。
22.使用在步骤 13 取下的 4 颗螺丝 (19) 来安装 24.关闭 DP（A），使原稿垫（B）粘贴到 DP 上。
DP 中继板的盖板 (20)。
21.DP 케이블 커버 (E) 를 DP 케이블 연결 커버 원고매트 부착

(22) 에 부착하고 스텝 14 에서 제거한 나사 23.벨크로 (34) 를 위로 향하게 하고 원고매트 (B) 를 원고대 유리판에 놓습니다 .
(21) 1 개로 DP 케이블 연결 커버 (22) 를 부 원고매트 (B) 는 90° 가 되어 있는 각을 원고 안내판의 좌측 안에 맞출 것 .
착합니다 . 24.DP(A) 를 내리고 원고매트 (B) 를 DP(A) 에 부착합니다 .
22.13 단계에서 분리한 나사 (19) 4 개를 사용하
여 DP 중계기판 커버 (20) 를 설치합니다 .
21.DP ケーブルカバー(E) を DP ケーブル接続カ原稿マットの貼り付け

バー(22) に取り付ける。手順 14 で外したビ 23.マジックテープ (34) を上に向けて、原稿マット (B) をコンタクトガラス上に置く。
ス (21)1 本で DP ケーブル接続カバー(22) 原稿マット (B) は 90° になっている角を原稿指示板の左奥に合わせること。
を取り付ける。 24.DP(A) を下ろし、原稿マット (B) を DP(A) に貼り付ける。
22.手順 13 で外したビス (19)4 本で、DP 中継基
板カバー(20) を取り付ける。
10
A
I
H
J(M3x8)
Installing the hinge cover (DP-772 only) 26.Install the right hinge cover (I) using the M3
For the DP-770(B), proceed to step 27 on page × 8 screw BLACK (J).
12.
25.Install the left hinge cover (H).
Installation des couvercles de charnière 26.Installer le couvercle de la charnière droite

(DP-772 uniquement) (l) à l'aide de la vis M3 × 8 NOIRE (J).
Pour le DP-770(B), passer à l'étape 27 de la
page 12.
25.Installer le couvercle de la charnière gauche
(H).
Instalación de la cubierta de las bisagras 26.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra derecha (I)

(DP-772 solamente) usando el tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO (J).
Para el DP-770(B), vaya al paso 27 de la página
12.
25.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda
(H).
Installieren der Scharnierabdeckung 26.Die rechte Scharnierabdeckung (I) mit der

(nur DP-772) M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ (J) anbringen.
Beim DP-770(B) gehen Sie zum Schritt 27 auf
Seite 12 weiter.
25.Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) anbrin-
gen.
Installazione del coperchio cerniera 26.Installare il coperchio cerniera destra (I) uti-
(solo DP-772) lizzando la vite M3 × 8 NERA (J).
Per DP-770(B), procedere con il punto 27 a
pagina 12.
25.Installare il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H).
安装铰链盖板（仅限 DP-772） 26.使用 1 颗 M3×8 螺丝 BLACK(J) 来安装右部铰

DP-770(B) 跳至 P12 的步骤 27。链盖板 (I)。
25.安装左部铰链盖板 (H)。
힌지커버 부착（DP-772 만） 26.나사 M3×8BLACK(J) 1 개로 우측 힌지커버

DP-770(B) 은 P12 의 순서 27 으로 진행 . (I) 를 부착합니다 .
25.좌측 힌지커버 (H) 를 부착합니다 .
ヒンジカバーの取り付け（DP-772 のみ） 26.ビス M3×8BLACK(J)1 本で右ヒンジカバー

DP-770(B) は、
P12 の手順 27 に進む。 (I) を取り付ける。
25.左ヒンジカバー(H) を取り付ける。
11
A (a)
(b) K
L
Adhere the label 28.Adhere Label “Operation procedure” (K) of 29.Adhere Caution label “Original face up!” (L)
27.Clean the label on the original table with which the language corresponding to the of which the language corresponding to the
alcohol. destination of the MFP onto the existing destination of the MFP onto the label on the
label on the original table. Figure (a) original table. Figure (b)
Coller l’étiquette relative 28.Coller l'étiquette “Processus opératoire” (K) 29.Coller l'étiquette de mise en garde “Original
27.Avec de l'alcool, nettoyer létiquette se trou- dans la langue correspondant au destina- en haut!” (L) dans la langue correspondant
vant sur le plateau d'original. taire du MFP sur l'étiquette existante sur le au destinataire du MFP sur l'étiquette du
plateau d'original du DP. Figure (a) plateau d'original. Figure (b)
Pegue la etiqueta 28.Adhiera la etiqueta “Procedimiento opera- 29.Pegue la etiqueta de precaución “¡La cara
27.Limpie con alcohol la etiqueta de la cubierta tivo” (K) del idioma correspondiente al des- del original hacia arriba!” (L), del idioma que
de originales. tino del MFP sobre la etiqueta que se corresponde al destino del MFP, sobre la eti-
encuentra sobre la cubierta de originales. queta en la cubierta de originales. Figura (b)
Figura (a)
Anbringen des Schildes 28.Das Schild „Funktionsanweisung“ (K) in der 29.Das Warnschild „Originalschriftseite nach
27.Das Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld mit Sprache des jeweiligen Einsatzlandes des oben!“ (L) in der Sprache des jeweiligen
Alkohol reinigen. MFP auf das vorhandene Schild auf dem Einsatzlandes des MFP auf das vorhandene
Originalbedienfeld aufkleben. Abbildung (a) Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld aufkle-
ben. Abbildung (b)
Applicazione dell’etichetta 28.Far aderire l’etichetta “Procedure di funzion- 29.Far aderire l’etichetta di avvertenza “Origi-
27.Pulire con alcool l’etichetta sul piano origi- amento” (K) corrispondente alla lingua di nale rivolto verso l’alto!” (L) corrispondente
nale. destinazione dell’MFP, sull’etichetta esis- alla lingua di destinazione dell’MFP,
tente sul piano originale. Figura (a) sull’etichetta del piano originale. Figura (b)
粘贴标签 28.不需要本步骤。 29.不需要本步骤。

27.不需要本步骤。
라벨 부착 28.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 . 29.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .

27.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .
ラベルの貼り付け 28.この作業は不要。 29.この作業は不要。

27.この作業は不要。
12
DP-772
B F
K*
B
G(M4x14)(8)
C*
J(M3x8) K**
E-1
D E-2
M N(M3x8) L
H I
A C
D. Angle control fitting............................................... 1 J. M3 × 8 screw BLACK*1 ......................................... 1

English
E-1.DP cable cover1 *2 .............................................. 1 K. Label “Operation procedure” ................................1
Supplied parts E-2.DP cable cover2 *2 .............................................. 1 *: for metric specification
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 F. Pin ........................................................................ 1 **: for inch specification
B. Original mat.......................................................... 1 G. M4 × 14TP screw ................................................. 8 L. Caution label “Original face up!”...........................1
C. Fixing fitting (width: 38.5 mm) ..........2 (DP-770(B)) H. Left hinge cover*1 .................................................. 1 M. DP relay PWB*1 .................................................... 1
1 (DP-772) I. Right hinge cover*1 ............................................... 1 N. M3 × 8 screw*1 ...................................................... 2
C*. Fixing fitting (width: 45 mm)*1 .............................. 1 *1: DP-772 only , *2: (E-1) and (E-2) are not used.
D. Fixation d’angle .................................................... 1 K. Étiquette relative à la procédure d’utilisation........ 1

Français * : pour des spécifications métriques
E-1.Couvercle du câble du DP1 *2 ............................. 1
Pièces fournies ** : pour des spécifications anglo-saxonnes
E-2.Couvercle du câble du DP2 *2 ............................. 1
F. Goupille ................................................................ 1 L. Étiquette d’avertissement relative à l’orientation
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 vers le haut de la face de l’original ......................1
B. Plaque d’original .................................................. 1 G. Vis TP M4 × 14..................................................... 8
H. Couvercle de charnière gauche*1 ......................... 1 M. Carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP*1 .................1
C. Fixation (largeur: 38,5 mm).................. 2 (DP-770(B)) N. Vis M3 × 8*1 ......................................................... 2
1 (DP-772) I. Couvercle de charnière droite*1 ............................ 1
*1: DP-772 uniquement , *2:(E-1) et (E-2) ne sont pas utili-
C.*Fixation (largeur: 45 mm)*1 ................................... 1 J. Vis M3 × 8 NOIRE*1 .............................................. 1 sés.
C*.Herraje de fijación (anchura: 45 mm)*1 ................. 1 J. Tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO*1 ......................................1

Español
D. Herraje de control de ángulo................................ 1 K. Etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” ..................... 1
Partes suministradas E-1.Cubierta del cable del DP1 *2 .............................. 1 *: para especificaciones en el sistema métrico
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.Cubierta del cable del DP2 *2 .............................. 1 **: para especificaciones en el sistema de pulgadas
B. Alfombrilla para originales.................................... 1 F. Pasador................................................................ 1 L. Etiqueta de precaución “Original cara arriba” ......1
C. Herraje de fijación (anchura: 38,5 mm) G. Tornillo TP M4 × 14 .............................................. 8 M. PWB del relé del DP*1...........................................1
.........................................................2 (DP-770(B)) H. Cubierta de la bisagra izquierda*1 ........................ 1 N. Tornillo M3 × 8*1 .................................................... 2
1(DP-772) I. Cubierta de la bisagra derecha*1 .......................... 1 *1: DP-772 solamente , *2: (E-1) y (E-2) no se utilizan.
J. M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ*1 ............................. 1
C*.Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 45 mm)*1.............. 1
Deutsch K. Schild “Funktionsanweisung” ..............................1
D. Winkeleinstellbefestigung..................................... 1 *: für metrische Angaben
Enthaltene Teile E-1.DP-Kabelabdeckung1 *2 ..................................... 1 **: für Angaben in Zoll
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.DP-Kabelabdeckung2 *2 ..................................... 1 L. Warnschild “Originalschriftseite nach oben” ........ 1
B. Originalmatte........................................................ 1 F. Stift ....................................................................... 1 M. DP-Verbindungsplatine *1 ..................................... 1
C. Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 38,5 mm) G. M4 × 14TP Schraube ........................................... 8 N. M3 × 8 Schraube*1 ................................................2
................................................................... 2(DP-770(B)) H. Linke Scharnierabdeckung*1................................. 1 *1: nur DP-772 , *2: (E-1) und ( E-2)werden nicht
1 (DP-772) I. Rechte Scharnierabdeckung*1 .............................. 1 benötigt.
C*. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 45 mm)*1 ...... 1 J. Vite M3 × 8 NERA*1 .............................................. 1
Italiano
D. Accessorio di regolazione angolare ..................... 1 K. Etichetta “Procedura di funzionamento” ..............1
Parti fornite E-1.Coperchio del cavo DP1 *2 .................................. 1 *: per specifiche in unità del sistema metrico
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.Coperchio del cavo DP2 *2 .................................. 1 **: per specifiche in pollici
B. Tappetino originale ............................................... 1 F. Perno.................................................................... 1 L. Etichetta di avvertimento “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” ... 1
C. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 38,5 mm) G. Vite M4 × 14TP .................................................... 8 M. Scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP*1 ...1
................................................................... 2(DP-770(B)) H. Coperchio cerniera sinistra*1 ................................ 1 N. Vite M3 × 8*1 ......................................................... 2
1 (DP-772) I. Coperchio cerniera destra*1 .................................. 1 *1: Solo DP-772 , *2:(E-1) e (E-2) non sono utilizzati.
简体中文 C*.固定工具 ( 宽 45mm) *1 ..................1 I. 右部铰链盖板 *1 ........................1

D. 角度限制工具 .........................1 J. M3×8 螺丝 BLACK*1 .....................1
附属品 E-1.DP 电缆盖板 1*2 ...................... 1 M. DP 中继板 *1 ...........................1
A. DP................................... 1 E-2.DP 电缆盖板 2*2 ...................... 1 N. M3×8 螺丝 *1 ..........................2
B. 原稿垫............................... 1 F. 销 ...................................1 *1: 仅限 DP-772
C. 固定工具 ( 宽 38.5mm) ...... 2(DP-770(B)) G. M4×14TP 螺丝 .........................8 *2: 不使用 (E-1) 和 (E-2)。
1(DP-772) H. 左部铰链盖板 *1 ........................1 (K) 和 (L) 并非附属品。
한국어 C*.고정쇠 (45mm 폭 ) *1 ................................1 I. 힌지커버 우 *1 ......................................... 1

D. 각도 고정쇠 ........................................... 1 J. 나사 M3×8BLACK*1 ................................ 1
동봉품 E-1.DP 케이블커버 1*2 ................................. 1 M. DP 중계기판 *1 ....................................... 1
A. DP........................................................ 1 E-2.DP 케이블커버 2*2 ................................. 1 N. 나사 M3×8*1 .......................................... 2
B. 원고매트................................................ 1 F. 핀 ........................................................ 1 *1: DP-772 만
C. 고정쇠 (38.5mm 폭 ) .............. 2(DP-770(B)) G. 나사 M4×14TP ...................................... 8 *2: (E-1) 와 (E-2) 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
1(DP-772) H. 힌지커버 좌 *1 ..........................................1 （K）（L）는 동봉되어 있지 않습니다 .
日本語 C*.固定金具 (45mm 幅 )*1 ...................1 I. 右ヒンジカバー*1 ......................1

D. 角度規制金具 ........................ 1 J. ビス M3×8BLACK*1 ......................1
同梱品 E-1.DP ケーブルカバー1*2 ................. 1 M. DP 中継基板 *1 ........................ 1
A. DP................................... 1 E-2.DP ケーブルカバー2*2 ................. 1 N. ビス M3×8*1 .......................... 2
B. 原稿マット........................... 1 F. ピン ................................ 1 *1:DP-772 のみ
C. 固定金具 (38.5mm 幅 ) ...... 2(DP-770(B)) G. ビス M4×14TP ........................ 8 *2:(E-1),(E-2) は使用しない。
1(DP-772) H. 左ヒンジカバー*1 ......................1 (K)(L) は、同梱されていない。
13
B
P
O. DP cable cover B *3 .................................... 1

P. DP cable cover C *3.................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
materials from the parts supplied.
*3:(O) and (P) are supplied with the machine.
O. Couvercle du câble du DP B *3 .................. 1

P. Couvercle du câble du DP C *3 .................. 1 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
*3:(O) et (P) sont fournis avec la machine. pièces fournies.
O. Cubierta del cable del DP B *3 ................... 1

P. Cubierta del cable del DP C *3 .................. 1 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-
rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
*3:(O) y (P) se proporcionan con la máquina.
O. DP-Kabelabdeckung B *3 ........................... 1
P. DP-Kabelabdeckung C *3 ........................... 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
*3:(O) und (P) werden mit dem Gerät ausgeliefert. Teilen entfernt wurden.
O. Coperchio del cavo DP B *3 ....................... 1

P. Coperchio del cavo DP B *3 ....................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
protezione dalle parti fornite.
*3:(O) e (P) sono forniti con la macchina.
O. DP 电缆盖板 B *3 ...................... 1
P. DP 电缆盖板 C *3 ...................... 1 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
下。
*3:（O),(P) 是机器的附属品。
O. DP 케이블커버 B *3 .............................. 1
P. DP 케이블커버 C *3 .............................. 1 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
*3: (O),(P) 는 본체와 함께 제공됩니다 .
O. DP ケーブルカバーB *3 ................. 1
P. DP ケーブルカバーC *3 ................. 1 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合
は必ず取り外すこと。
*3:(O),(P) は機械本体に同梱。
14
G(M4x14)
C
G(M4x14)
C B
NOTICE Procedure Attach the fixing fitting (DP-770(B))

The illustrations of the DP in the Installation Before starting installation, be sure to turn the 1.Align projections (1) of each fixing fitting (C)
Guide are for DP-772. main power switch of the machine off, and with holes (2) on the MFP and insert the fix-
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet. ing fittings (C) into the MFP.
2.Secure each fixing fitting (C) with two M4 x
14TP screws (G).
REMARQUE Procédure Mettre en place la fixation (DP-770(B))

Les schémas du DP dans le Guide d''installation Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de 1.Aligner les saillies (1) de chacune des
concernent le DP-772. mettre la machine hors tension et de pièces de fixation (C) avec les trous (2) sur
débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise le MFP et insérer ces pièces (C) dans le
murale. MFP.
2.Fixer chacune des pièces de fixation (C)
avec deux vis M4 x 14TP (G).
AVISO Procedimiento Monte el herraje de fijación (DP-770(B))

Las ilustraciones del DP en la Guía de insta- Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de 1.Alinee las salientes (1) de cada herraje de
lación corresponden al DP-772. apagar el interruptor de encendido de la fijación (C) con los orificios (2) del MFP e
máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación inserte los herrajes de fijación (C) en el MFP.
de la toma de pared. 2.Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación
(C) con dos tornillos M4 x 14TP (G).
ANMERKUNG Vorgehensweise Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung (DP-

770(B))
Die Abbildungen des DP in der Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu-
1.Die Zapfen (1) jeder Befestigungshalterung
Installationsanleitung gelten für Modell DP-772. gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts
(C) mit den Öffnungen (2) am MFP ausrich-
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
ten und die Befestigungshalterungen (C) in
Steckdose gezogen ist. den MFP einsetzen.
2.Jede Befestigungshalterung (C) mit zwei M4
x 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen.
AVVISO Procedura Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio (DP-
770(B))
Le illustrazioni del DP nella Guida Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
1.Allineare le sporgenze (1) di ogni accessorio
all’installazione sono per il modello DP-772. macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
di fissaggio (C) con i fori (2) sull’MFP, ed
corrente.
inserire gli accessori di fissaggio (C)
nell’MFP.
2.Bloccare ogni accessorio di fissaggio (C)
con le due viti M4 x 14TP (G).
注意安装步骤安装固定工具。（DP-770(B)）
安装手册中关于 DP 的图示以 DP-772 为例。安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插 1.将各固定工具（C）上的突出部分（1）与 MFP
座拔下电源插头。上的孔（2）对齐，然后将固定工具（C）插入
MFP 中。
2.用两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝（G）固定各固定工具
（C）。
주의 설치순서 고정쇠의 부착（DP-770(B)）

설치순서에 기재되어 있는 DP 일러스트는 DP- 설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 1.고정쇠 (C) 의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 의 구멍 (2)
772 입니다 . 위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리 을 맞추고 MFP 에 고정쇠 (C) 를 꽂습니다 .
하십시오 . 2.나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 2 개의 고정쇠
(C) 를 고정합니다 .
注意取付手順固定金具の取り付け（DP-770(B)）
設置手順書に記載している DP のイラストは、必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機 1.固定金具 (C) の突起 (1) と MFP の穴 (2) を
DP-772 です。械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ合わせ、MFP に固定金具 (C) を差し込む。
と。 2.ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で 2 つの固定金具
(C) を固定する。
15
G(M4x14)
C* G(M4x14)
G(M4x14) F
B C G(M4x14)
C (C*)
A
2
C A
4
2
C (C*)
1 3
1 5
Attach the fixing fitting (DP-772) Install the DP 5.Install DP (A) onto the MFP securely with pin
1.Align the projections (1) on the right fixing fit- 3.Align hinge hole (3) of DP (A) with pin (4) of (F) and two M4 × 14TP screws (G).
ting (C) and on the wider left fixing fitting (C*) fixing fitting (C), place DP (A) on the MFP.
with the respective holes (2) in the MFP and 4.Slide the DP (A) toward the front side and
then insert the fixing fittings into the MFP. engage hinges into hooks (5) on fixing fit-
2.Secure each of the fixing fittings (C) (C*) tings (C).
with 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G).
Mettre en place la fixation (DP-772) Installer le DP 5.Installer le DP (A) sur le MFP en le fixant à
1.Aligner les saillies (1) de la fixation droite (C) 3.Aligner le trou de la charnière (3) du DP (A) l’aide de la goupille (F) et des deux vis TP
et de la fixation gauche plus large (C*) avec sur la goupille (4) de la fixation (C) et placer M4 × 14 (G).
les trous correspondants (2) du MFP et le DP (A) sur le MFP.
insérer les fixations dans le MFP. 4.Faire glisser le DP (A) vers l'avant et
2.Fixer chaque des fixations (C) (C*) avec 2 engager les charnières dans les crochets (5)
vis TP M4 × 14 (G). sur les pièces de fixation (C).
Monte el herraje de fijación (DP-772) Instale el DP 5.Instale el DP (A) firmemente en el MFP con
1. Alinee los salientes (1) del herraje de fijación dere- 3.Alinee el orificio de bisagra (3) del DP (A) el pasador (F) y dos tornillos TP M4 × 14
cho (C) y del herraje de fijación izquierdo más con el pasador (4) del herraje de fijación (C) (G).
ancho (C*) con los orificios correspondientes (2)
y coloque el DP (A) en el MFP.
del MFP y, después, inserte los herrajes de fijación
en el MFP. 4.Deslice el DP (A) hacia el frente y enganche
2. Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación (C) las bisagras en los ganchos (5) de los her-
(C*) con 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G). rajes de fijación (C).
Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung (DP-772) Installieren des DP 5.DP (A) sicher mit einem Stift (F) und zwei M4
1. Die Zapfen (1) an der rechten Befestigungshalter- 3.Scharnierloch (3) des DP (A) mit Stift (4) der × 14TP Schrauben (G) am MFP befestigen.
ung (C) und an der breiteren Befestigungshalter-
Befestigungshalterung (C) ausrichten, und
ung (C*) mit den entsprechenden Öffnungen (2)
am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterun- DP (A) auf den MFP stellen.
gen in den MFP einsetzen. 4.Den DP (A) nach vorne hin verschieben und
2. Die Befestigungshalterungen (C) (C*) mit den 2 M4 die Scharniere in die Haken (5) an den Bef-
× 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen. estigungshalterungen (C) einsetzen.
Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio (DP-772) Montaggio del DP 5.Montare il DP (A) sull’MFP assicurandolo
1. Allineare le sporgenze (1) sull'accessorio di fissag- 3.Allineare il foro della cerniera (3) del DP (A) con il perno (F) e due viti M4 × 14TP (G).
gio destro (C) e sull'accessorio di fissaggio sinistro con il perno (4) dell’accessorio di fissaggio
più largo (C*) con i rispettivi fori (2) nell'MFP, e (C), quindi posizionare il DP (A) sull’MFP.
quindi inserire gli accessori di fissaggio nell'MFP.
4.Far scorrere il DP (A) verso il lato anteriore
2. Fissare ciascuno degli accessori di fissaggio (C)
(C*) con 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G).
ed inserire le cerniere nei ganci (5) sugli
accessori di fissaggio (C).
安装固定工具 (DP-772) 安装 DP 5.用销（F）和两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝（G）将 DP

1.将固定工具 (C) 从右侧、宽幅固定夹具 (C*) 3.将 DP（A）的铰链孔（3）对准固定工具（C）的（A）安装到 MFP 上。
从左侧将各自的突出部分 (1) 与 MFP 的孔销（4），并将 DP（A）放在 MFP 上。
(2) 对齐并插入到 MFP 中。 4.朝前侧滑动 DP（A），然后将铰链与固定工具
2.使用各 2 颗 M4×14 螺丝 TP(G) 来固定固定工（C）上的卡扣（5）相啮合。
具 (C) 与固定工具 (C*)
고정쇠의 부착（DP-772） DP 부착 5.핀 (F) 1 개와 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로

1.우측에 고정쇠 (C), 좌측에 광폭 고정쇠 (C*) 3.DP(A) 의 힌지부 구멍 (3) 과 고정쇠 (C) 핀 DP(A) 를 MFP 에 고정합니다 .
각각의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 구멍 (2) 을 맞추고 (4) 을 맞추고 MFP 에 DP(A) 를 올립니다 .
MFP 에 꽂습니다 . 4.DP(A) 를 밀어 힌지부를 고정쇠 (C) 의 걸쇠
2.나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 고정쇠 (C) 와 (5) 에 끼웁니다 .
고정쇠 (C*) 를 고정합니다 .
固定金具の取り付け（DP-772） DP の取り付け 5.ピン (F)1 本とビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で

1.右側に固定金具 (C)、左側に幅広の固定金具 3.DP(A) のヒンジ部の穴 (3) と固定金具 (C) DP(A) を MFP に固定する。
(C*) のそれぞれの突起 (1) と MFP の穴 (2) のピン (4) を合わせ、MFP に DP(A) を乗せ
を合わせ、MFP に差し込む。る。
2.ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で固定金具 (C) と 4.DP(A) を手前にスライドさせ、ヒンジ部を固
固定金具 (C*) を固定する。定金具 (C) の引っ掛け部 (5) にはめ込む。
16
6
8
A
12
9
11
G(M4x14)
D
10
7
Install the angle control fitting To adjust DP open-close angle 30 degrees 9.Remove stop ring (11) of angle control fitting
To adjust DP open-close angle 60 degrees 7.Open the upper cover (6) of the DP (A). (D) that has been installed in step 6 to
6.Install angle control fitting (D) at the rear side 8.Remove the four screws (7) and (8). remove shaft (12).
of the right hinge with two M4 × 14TP screws Remove the strap (9) from the rear cover
(G). (10). Remove the rear cover (10) of the DP
(A).
Installer la fixation d’angle Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture 9.Retirer l’anneau de butée (11) de la fixation
Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture du DP de 30 degrés d’angle (D) installée à l’étape 6 pour enlever
du DP de 60 degrés 7.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (6) du DP (A). la tige (12).
6.Placer la fixation d’angle (D) à l’arrière de la 8.Retirer les quatre vis (7) et (8).Retirer la
charnière droite à l’aide des deux vis TP M4 courroie (9) du couvercle arrière (10).Retirer
× 14 (G). la couvercle arrière (10) du DP (A).
Instale el herraje de control de ángulo Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 30 9.Retire el anillo de retención (11) del herraje
Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 60 grados de control de ángulo (D) que se instaló en el
grados 7.Abra la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A). paso 6 para retirar el eje (12).
6.Instale el herraje de control de ángulo (D) en 8.Quite los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8).Retire la
el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha con correa (9) de la cubierta posterior (10).Quite
dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G). la cubierta posterior (10) del DP (A).
Installieren der Winkeleinstellbefestigung Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswin- 9.Anschlagring (11) von der Winkeleinstellbef-
Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswin- kels des DP um 30 Grad estigung (D) abnehmen, die in Schritt 6 mon-
kels des DP um 60 Grad 7. Die obere Abdeckung (6) des DP (A) öffnen. tiert wurde, um die Welle (12) zu entfernen.
6.Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) an der Rück- 8.Entfernen Sie die vier Schrauben (7) und
seite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 × (8).Entfernen Sie den Riemen (9) der hin-
14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen. teren Abdeckung (10).Entfernen Sie die hin-
tere Abdeckung (10) des DP (A).
Montaggio dell’accessorio di regolazione Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura 9.Rimuovere l’anello di bloccaggio (11)
angolare del DP a 30 gradi dell’accessorio di regolazione angolare (D)
Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura 7.Aprire il pannello superiore (6) del DP (A). che era stato installato al Punto 6 per
del DP a 60 gradi 8.Togliere le quattro viti (7) e (8).Rimuovere la rimuovere l’albero (12).
6.Montare l’accessorio di regolazione ango- cinghietta (9) dal coperchio posteriore
lare (D) sul lato posteriore della cerniera (10).Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (10)
destra con due viti M4 × 14TP (G). del DP (A).
安装角度限制工具若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 30 度 9.拆下在第 6 步中安装的角度控制配件（D）的

若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 60 度 7.打开 DP（A）的上盖板（6）。止动环（11），以将轴（12）拆下。
6.在右部铰链的后部使用两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝 8.取下 4 颗螺丝 (7)，(8)。从后盖板 (10) 上取
（G）安装角度限制工具（D）。下塑料片 (9)。取下 DP(A) 的后盖板 (10)。
각도 고정쇠의 부착 DP 개폐 각도를 30 도로 설정하는 경우 9.순서 6 에서 부착한 각도 고정쇠 (D) 의 스톱

DP 개폐각도를 60 도로 설정하는 경우 7.DP(A) 의 DP 윗커버 (6) 를 엽니다 . 링 (11) 1 개를 제거하고 샤프트 (12) 를 제거
6.우 힌지 뒷측에 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로 8.나사 (7), (8) 4 개를 제거합니다 . 스트랩 (9) 합니다 .
각도 고정쇠 (D) 를 부착합니다 . 를 후면 커버 (10) 에서 제거합니다 .DP(A)
의 후면 커버 (10) 를 제거합니다 .
角度規制金具の取り付け DP 開閉角度を 30 度に設定する場合 9.手順 6 で取り付けた角度規制金具 (D) のス

DP 開閉角度を 60 度に設定する場合 7.DP(A) の DP 上カバー(6) を開く。トップリング (11)1 個を外し、シャフト
6.右ヒンジ後側にビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で角度 8.ビス (7)、(8) 4 本を外す。ストラップ (9) を (12) を取り外す。
規制金具 (D) を取り付ける。後カバー(10) から外す。 DP(A) の後カバー
17
14 14
11
B 12
12
13 13
10. Insert shaft (12) into the rear side of the right hinge. Connect the DP signal line (DP-770(B) only)
11. Attach stop ring (11) to the notch of shaft (12) and secure shaft (12). For the DP-772, proceed to step 13 on page 20.
12. Reinstall the rear cover (10) using the four screws (7) and (8) removed in step 13.Remove the screw (13) and remove the DP cable connection cover
8.Attach the strap (9) in the rear cover (10).Close the upper cover (6) of the (14).
DP (A).
*(14) is not used.
10. Insérer la tige (12) à l’arrière de la charnière droite. Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP-770(B) uniquement)
11. Fixer l’anneau de butée (11) sur l’encoche de la tige (12) et mettre en place Pour le DP-772, passer à l'étape 13 en page 20.
la tige (12).
12. Remonter la couvercle arrière (10) à l'aide des quatre vis (7) et (8) retirées à 13.Déposer la vis (13) et déposer le couvercle de la connexion du câble
l'étape 8.Fixer la courroie (9) dans le couvercle arrière (10).Refermer le du DP (14).
couvercle supérieur (6) du DP (A). *(14) n'est pas utilisé.
10. Inserte el eje (12) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha. Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP-770(B) solamente)
11. Fije el anillo de retención (11) a la muesca del eje (12) y asegure el eje (12). Para el DP-772, vaya al paso 13 de la página 20.
12. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta posterior (10) con los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8) 13.Quite el tornillo (13) y quite la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP
que quitó en el paso 8.Coloque la correa (9) de la cubierta posterior (14).
(10).Cierre la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A).
*(14) no se utiliza.
10. Welle (12) in die Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einsetzen. Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur DP-770(B))
11. Anschlagring (11) an der Wellenkerbe (12) anbringen und Welle befestigen (12). Beim DP-772 weitergehen zu Schritt 13 auf Seite 20.
12. Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (10) wieder an. Benutzen Sie die vier 13.Die Schraube (13) entfernen und die Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelan-
Schrauben (7) und (8) aus Schritt 8.Befestigen Sie den Riemen (9) der hinteren
schlusses abnehmen.
Abdeckung (10).Schließen Sie die obere Abdeckung (6) des DP (A).
*(14) wird nicht benötigt.
10. Inserire l’albero (12) nella parte posteriore della cerniera destra. Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP-770(B))
11. Applicare l’anello di bloccaggio (11) nell’incavo dell’albero (12) e assicurare Per il DP-772, procedere al passo 13 a pagina 20.
l’albero (12). 13.Rimuovere la vite (13) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio di la connes-
12. Rimontare il coperchio posteriore (10) utilizzando le quattro viti (7) e (8) sione del cavo DP (14).
rimosse al punto 8.Rimontare la cinghietta (9) sul coperchio posteriore
(10).Chiudere il pannello superiore (6) del DP (A). *(14) non è utilizzato.
10.将轴（12）插入到右部铰链的后部。连接 DP 信号线（仅限 DP-770(B)）

11.将止动环（11）安装到轴（12）的切口并将轴（12）固定。 DP-772 跳至 P20 的步骤 13。
12.使用步骤 8 中取下的 4 颗螺丝 (7)，(8) 来按原样安装后盖板 (10)。把塑 13.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (13)，拆下 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14)。
料片 (9) 安装到后盖板 (10)。关闭 DP(A) 的 DP 上盖板 (6)。 ※ 不使用 (14)。
10. 우 힌지 뒷측에 샤프트 (12) 를 삽입합니다 . DP 신호선의 접속（DP-770(B) 만）

11. 스톱링 (11) 을 샤프트 (12) 의 구에 부착하고 샤프트 (12) 를 고정합니다 . DP-772 은 P20 의 순서 13 으로 진행 .
12. 순서 8 에서 제거한 나사 (7),(8) 4 개를 사용하여 후면 커버 (10) 를 원래대 13.나사 (13) 1 개를 빼고 DP 케이블 접속커버 (14) 를 제거합니다 .
로 부착합니다 . 스트랩 (9) 을 후면 커버 (10) 에 부착합니다 .DP(A) 의 DP ※(14) 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
윗 커버 (6) 를 닫습니다 .
10.右ヒンジ後側にシャフト (12) を挿入する。 DP 信号線の接続（DP-770(B) のみ）

11.ストップリング (11) をシャフト (12) の溝に取り付け、シャフト (12) DP-772 は P20 の手順 13 へ進む。
を固定する。 13.ビス (13)1 本を外して、 DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) を外す。
12.手順 8 で外したビス (7)、(8) 4 本で後カバー(10) を元通り取り付け ※(14) は使用しない。
る。ストラップ (9) を後カバー(10) に取り付ける。DP(A) の DP 上カ
バー(6) を閉じる。
18
15 15
O B
17
O 16
14.Pass the DP signal line cable (15) along the 15.Connect the DP signal line connector (16) to 16.Install the DP cable cover B (O).
large groove in the DP cable cover B (O). the connector (17) of the ISC PWB.
14.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (15) 15.Raccordez le connecteur de ligne de signal 16.Installez le couvercle B du câble DP (O).
dans la grande rainure du couvercle B du DP (16) sur le connecteur (17) de l'ISC
câble DP (O). PWB.
14.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP 15.Conecte el conector de línea de señales del 16.Instale la cubierta de cables B del DP (O).
(15) a lo largo de la ranura grande de la DP (16) al conector (17) de ISC PWB.
cubierta de cables B del DP (O).
14.Führen Sie die DP Signalleitung (15) durch 15.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 16.Befestigen Sie die Steckerabdeckung B (O)
die große Nut der DP Steckerabdeckung B (16) des DP mit dem Steckverbinder (17) der des DP.
(O). ISC-Platine.
14.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP 15.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale 16.Installare il coperchio del cavo DP B (O).
(15) lungo la scanalatura grande sul coper- DP (16) al connettore (17) della scheda ISC
chio B del cavo DP (O). PWB.
14.将 DP 信号线（15）穿过 DP 电缆盖板 B（O）的 15.把 DP 信号线的接插件（16）和 ISC 电路板的 16.安装 DP 电缆盖板 B（O)。
大沟槽。接插件（17）相连接。
14.DP 케이블 커버 B(O) 의 큰 홈을 따라 DP 시 15.DP 시그널 라인 커넥터 (16) 를 ISC PWB 의 16.DP 케이블 커버 B(O) 를 설치합니다 .
그널 라인 케이블 (15) 을 통과시킵니다 . 커넥터 (17) 에 연결합니다 .
14.DP ケーブルカバーB(O) の大きい溝に DP 信 15.DP 信号線コネクター(16) を ISC 基板のコネ 16.DP ケーブルカバーB(O) を取り付ける。
号線 (15) を通す。クター(17) に接続する。
19
B
P
19
20
18
20
13
21
17.Attach the DP cable cover C (P) to the DP Connect the DP signal line (DP-772 only) 14.Remove the two screws (20). Remove the
cable cover B (O) and install the DP cable 13.Remove the screw (18).Remove the DP cover (21) from the machine.
cover C (P) using the screw (13) removed in relay PWB cover (19).
step 13.
Proceed to step 25 on page 25.
17.Fixer le couvercle du câble du DP C (P) sur Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP-772 14.Retirez les deux vis (20).Retirer le couvercle
le couvercle du câble du DP B (O) et uniquement) (21) de la machine.
installer le couvercle du câble du DP C (P) à 13.Retirez la vis (18).Retirer le couvercle du cir-
l'aide de la vis (13) déposée à l'étape 13. cuit imprimé du relais du DP (19).
Passer à l'étape 25 de la page 25.
17. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP C (P) a la Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP-772 14.Quite los dos tornillos (20).Retire la cubierta
cubierta del cable del DP B (O) e instale la solamente) (21) de la máquina.
cubierta del cable del DP C (P) usando el 13.Quite el tornillo (18).Retire la cubierta de
tornillo (13) quitado en el paso 13. PWB del relé del DP (19).
Vaya al paso 25 de la página 25.
17.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung C (P) an der DP- Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur 14.Entfernen Sie die beiden Schrauben
Kabelabdeckung B (O) anbringen und die DP-772) (20).Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung (21) vom
DP-Kabelabdeckung C (P) mittels der in 13.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (18).Entfernen Gerät.
Schritt 13 entfernten Schraube (13) befesti- Sie die Abdeckung (19) der DP-Verbindung-
gen. splatine zum Vorlageneinzug.
Weitergehen zu Schritt 25 auf Seite 25.
17.Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP C (P) al Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP- 14.Togliere le due viti (20).Rimuovere il coper-
coperchio del cavo DP B (O), e quindi instal- 772) chio (21) dalla macchina.
lare il coperchio del cavo DP C (P) utiliz- 13.Togliere la vite (18).Rimuovere la scheda a
zando la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 13. circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (19).
Procedere al passo 25 a pagina 25.
17.将 DP 电缆盖板 C(P) 安装到 DP 电缆盖板连接 DP 信号线（仅限 DP-772） 14.取下 2 颗螺丝（20）。从机器上拆下盖板

B(O) 上，使用步骤 13 中拆下的 1 颗螺丝 13.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (18)。取下 DP 中继板的盖板（21）。
(13) 来安装 DP 电缆盖板 C(P)。 (19)。
跳至 P25 的步骤 25。
17.DP 케이블 커버 C(P) 를 DP 케이블 커버 DP 시그널 라인 연결（DP-772 만） 14.나사 (20) 두 개를 제거합니다 . 본체에서 커
B(O) 에 부착하고 스텝 13 에서 제거한 나사 13.나사 (18) 1 개를 제거합니다 . 버 (21) 를 분리합니다 .
(13) 1 개로 DP 케이블 커버 C(P) 를 부착합 DP 중계기판 커버 (19) 를 제거합니다 .
니다 .
P25 의 스텝 25 로 진행 .
17.DP ケーブルカバーC(P) を DP ケーブルカ DP 信号線の接続（DP-772 のみ） 14.ビス (20)2 本を外す。機械本体からフタ

バーB(O) に取り付け、手順 13 で外したビス 13.ビス (18)1 本を外す。DP 中継基板カバー (21) を取り外す。
(13)1 本で固定する。 (19) を取り外す。
P25 の手順 25 へ進む。
20
24
23
24
B
25
22 25 O
15.Remove the screw (22) and remove the DP 16.Pass the DP signal line cable (24) along the large groove in the DP cable cover B (O).Pass the
cable connection cover (23). CIS data line cable (25) along the other small groove.
*(23) is not used. NOTICE
To avoid image problems that may be caused when the both of the DP signal line cable (24) and
CIS data line cable (25) were passed through in a same groove, be sure to slip the individual line
in a separate groove as shown in the figure.
15.Déposer la vis (22) et déposer le couvercle 16.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (24) dans la grande rainure du couvercle B du câble DP
de la connexion du câble du DP (23). (O).Passez le câble de ligne de données CIS (25) dans l'autre petite rainure.
*(23) n'est pas utilisé. REMARQUE
Pour éviter les problèmes d'image pouvant être causés lorsque le câble de ligne de signal DP
(24) et le câble de ligne de données CIS (25) ont été passé dans une même rainure, assurez-
vous de glisser chaque ligne dans une rainure à part comme indiqué sur la figure.
15.Quite el tornillo (22) y quite la cubierta de 16. Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP (24) a lo largo de la ranura grande de la cubierta de
conexión del cable del DP (23). cables B del DP (O).Pase el cable de línea de datos de CIS (25) a lo largo de la otra ranura
*(23) no se utiliza. pequeña.
AVISO
Para evitar posibles problemas de imagen como consecuencia de pasar tanto el cable de línea de
señales del DP (24) como el cable de línea de datos de CIS (25) a lo largo de la misma ranura,
asegúrese de pasar cada una de las líneas por una ranura distinta como se muestra en la imagen.
15.Die Schraube (22) entfernen und die 16.Führen Sie die DP Signalleitung (24) durch die große Nut der DP Steckerabdeckung B (O).Ver-
Abdeckung (23) des DP-Kabelanschlusses legen Sie die Datenleitung der CIS (25) durch die andere Nut.
abnehmen. ANMERKUNG
*(23) wird nicht benötigt. Um Probleme mit der Bildqualität zu vermeiden, die entstehen können, wenn die Signalleitung
(24) des DP und die Datenleitung der CIS (25) durch die gleiche Nut geführt werden, stellen Sie
sicher, dass jede Leitung in einer getrennten Nut geführt wird, wie in dem Bild gezeigt.
15.Rimuovere la vite (22) e quindi rimuovere il 16. Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP (24) lungo la scanalatura grande sul coperchio B del cavo
coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP DP (O).Far passare il cavo di linea dei dati CIS (25) lungo l'altra scanalatura piccola.
(23). AVVISO
*(23) non è utilizzato. Per evitare i problemi di immagine che si verificano quando il cavo di linea del segnale DP (24) e il
cavo di linea dei dati CIS (25) vengono fatti passare nella stessa scanalatura, ricordarsi di far pas-
sare questi due cavi in scanalature separate come indicato in figura.
15.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (22)，拆下 DP 电缆连接盖板 16.将 DP 信号线（24）穿过 DP 电缆盖板 B（O）的大沟槽。把 CIS 数据线（25）穿过别的小沟槽。
(23)。
※ 不使用 (23)。注意
如将 DP 信号线（24）和 CIS 数据线（25）穿过同一个槽，可能会出现图像异常，因此必须如图所示
分别穿过左右两侧的槽。
15.나사 (22) 1 개를 빼고 DP 케이블 접속커버 16.DP 케이블 커버 B(O) 의 큰 홈을 따라 DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (24) 을 통과시킵니다 . 다른 작은
(23) 를 제거합니다 . 홈을 따라 CIS 데이터 라인 케이블 (25) 을 통과시킵니다 .
※(23) 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
주의
DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (24) 과 CIS 데이터 라인 케이블 (25) 을 같은 홈에 통과시키는 경우 화상
문제가 발생할 수 있으므로 그림과 같이 반드시 선을 따로 넣도록 하십시오 .
15.ビス (22)1 本を外して、DP ケーブル接続カ 16.DP ケーブルカバーB(O) の大きい溝に DP 信号線 (24) を通す。別の小さい溝に CIS データ線
（25）
バー(23) を外す。を通す。
※(23) は使用しない。
注意
DP 信号線（24）
と CIS データ線（25）を同じ溝に通すと異常画像が発生する可能性があるため、
図
の様に左右の溝に別々に入れること。
21
B
27
29
26
28 M
17.Connect the DP signal line connector (26) to the connector (27) of the Installing the DP relay PWB
ISC PWB. 18.Connect connector (28) on the DP relay PWB (M) to connector (29) on
the MFP.
Push the lower part of the DP relay PWB (M) to make sure to con-
nect with connector (28).
17.Raccordez le connecteur de ligne de signal DP (26) sur le connecteur Installation de la carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP
(27) de l'ISC PWB. 18.Raccorder le connecteur (28) sur la carte de circuit imprimé relais du
DP (M) au connecteur (29) sur le MFP.
Appuyer sur la partie inférieure de la carte de circuit imprimé
relais du DP (M) pour s'assurer qu'elle est bien raccordée au con-
necteur (28).
17.Conecte el conector de línea de señales del DP (26) al conector (27) Instalación del PWB del relé del DP
de ISC PWB. 18.Conecte el conector (28) del PWB del relé del DP (M) al conector (29)
del MFP.
Presione la parte inferior de la PWB del relé del DP (M) para asegu-
rarse de que se conecta con el conector (28).
17.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung (26) des DP mit dem Installieren der DP-Verbindungsplatine
Steckverbinder (27) der ISC-Platine. 18.Den Stecker (28) an der DP-Verbindungsplatine (M) mit dem Stecker
(29) am MFP verbinden.
Drücken Sie auf den unteren Teil der DP-Verbindungsplatine (M),
um sicherzustellen, dass die Verbindung mit dem Stecker (28)
erfolgt.
17.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale DP (26) al connettore (27) Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP
della scheda ISC PWB. 18.Collegare il connettore (28) sulla scheda a circuiti stampati di
comunicazione DP (M) al connettore (29) sull’MFP.
Spingere la parte inferiore della Scheda a circuiti stampati di
comunicazione DP (M) per assicurarsi che venga collegata al con-
nettore (28).
17.把 DP 信号线的接插件（26）和 ISC 电路板的接插件（27）相连接。安装 DP 中继板

18.将 DP 中继板（M）上的接插件（28）连接至 MFP 上的接插件（29）。
按压 DP 中继板 (M) 的下部，来确认接插件（28）已完全连接。
17.DP 시그널 라인 커넥터 (26) 를 ISC PWB 의 커넥터 (27) 에 연결합니 DP 중계기판의 부착
다. 18.DP 중계기판 (M) 의 커넥터 (28) 를 MFP 의 커넥터 (29) 에 연결합니
다.
DP 중계 기판 (M) 의 하부를 눌러 코넥터 (28) 를 확실히 연결합니다 .
17.DP 信号線コネクター(26) を ISC 基板のコネクター(27) に接続する。 DP 中継基板の取り付け

18.DP 中継基板 (M) のコネクター(28) を、MFP のコネクター(29) に接続す
る。
　 DP 中継基板 (M) の下部を押し、コネクター(28) を確実に接続するこ
と。
22
N(M3x8) B
25
N
M
30
19.Secure the DP relay PWB (M). Secure it with the two M3 × 8 screws 20.Plug the CIS data line (25) into the connetor (30) on the DP relay PWB
(N) supplied with the DP-772. (M).
19.Fixez la DP relay PWB (M). Fixez-la avec les deux vis M3 × 8 (N) 20.Enficher le câble de la ligne des données du CIS (25) dans le con-
fournies avec le DP-772. necteur (30) de la carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP (M).
19.Fije el DP relay PWB (M). Fíjelo con los dos tornillos M3 × 8 (N) sumin- 20.Enchufe la línea de datos CIS (25) al conector (30) PWB del relé del
istrados con DP-772. DP (M).
19.Befestigen Sie die DP Verbindungsplatine (M). Befestigen Sie es mit 20.Die CIS-Datenleitung (25) an den Stecker(30) auf der DP-Verbindung-
den beiden M3 × 8 Schrauben (N), die sich im Lieferumfang des DP- splatine (M) anschließen.
772 befinden.
19.Fissare la scheda DP Relay PWB (M). Fissarla con le due viti M3 × 8 20.Inserire la linea dati CIS (25) nel connettore(30) sulla scheda a circuiti
(N) fornite con l'alimentatore DP-772. stampati di comunicazione DP (M).
19.固定 DP 中继板（M）。使用 DP-772 附带的 2 颗 M3X8(N) 螺丝来固定。 20.将 CIS 数据线 (25) 连接到 DP 中继电路板 (M) 上的接插件 (30) 上。
19.DP 중계 PWB (M) 를 고정합니다 . DP-772 에 같이 곤포의 나사 20.DP 중계기판 (M) 상의 커넥터 (30) 에 CIS 데이터선 (25) 을 접속합니
M3×8(N) 2 개로 고정합니다 . 다.
19.DP 中継基板 (M) を固定する。DP-772 に同梱のビス M3×8(N)2 本で固 20.DP 中継基板 (M) 上のコネクター(30) に CIS データ線 (25) を接続す
定する。る。
23
B O
22
21.Install the DP cable cover B (O). 22.Attach the DP cable cover C (P) to the DP cable cover B (O) and install
the DP cable cover C (P) using the screw (22) removed in step 15.
23.Install the cover (21) using the 2 screws (20) removed in step 14.
24.Install the DP relay PWB cover (19) using the screw (18) removed in
step 13.
21.Installez le couvercle B du câble DP (O). 22.Fixer le couvercle du câble du DP C (P) sur le couvercle du câble du
DP B (O) et installer le couvercle du câble du DP C (P) à l'aide de la vis
(22) déposée à l'étape 15.
23.Installez le couvercle (21) à l'aide des 2 vis (20) retirées à l'étape 14.
24.Installez le couvercle du circuit imprimé du relais du DP (19) à l'aide de
la vis (18) retirées à l'étape 13.
21.Instale la cubierta de cables B del DP (O). 22. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP C (P) a la cubierta del cable del DP B
(O) e instale la cubierta del cable del DP C (P) usando el tornillo (22)
quitado en el paso 15.
23.Instale la cubierta (21) con los 2 tornillos (20) que quitó en el paso 14.
24.Instale la cubierta de PWB del relé del DP (19) con los el tornillos (18)
que quitó en el paso 13.
21.Befestigen Sie die Steckerabdeckung B (O) des DP. 22.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung C (P) an der DP-Kabelabdeckung B (O)
anbringen und die DP-Kabelabdeckung C (P) mittels der in Schritt 15
entfernten Schraube (22) befestigen.
23.Bringen Sie Abdeckung (21) wieder an. Benutzen Sie die 2 Schrauben
(20) aus Schritt 14.
24.Bringen Sie die Abdeckung (19) der DP-Verbindungsplatine wieder an.
Benutzen Sie die Schraube (18) aus Schritt 13.
21. Installare il coperchio del cavo DP B (O). 22. .Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP C (P) al coperchio del cavo DP B (O), e
quindi installare il coperchio del cavo DP C (P) utilizzando la vite (22)
rimossa nel passo 15.
23. Installare il coperchio (21) utilizzando le 2 viti (20) rimosse al punto 14.
24. IInstallare il coperchio della scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP
(19) utilizzando le la viti (18) rimosse al punto 13.
21.安装 DP 电缆盖板 B（O)。 22.将 DP 电缆盖板 C(P) 安装到 DP 电缆盖板 B(O) 上，使用步骤 15 中拆下
的 1 颗螺丝 (22) 来安装 DP 电缆盖板 C(P)。
23.使用在步骤 14 取下的 2 颗螺丝 (20) 来安装盖板 (21)。
24.使用在步骤 13 取下的 1 颗螺丝 (18) 来安装 DP 中继板的盖板 (19)。
21.DP 케이블 커버 B(O) 를 설치합니다 . 22.DP 케이블 커버 C(P) 를 DP 케이블 커버 B(O) 에 부착하고 스텝 15 에
서 제거한 나사 (22) 1 개로 케이블 커버 C(P) 를 부착합니다 .
23.스텝 14 에서 분리한 나사 (20) 2 개를 사용하여 커버 (21) 를 설치합니
다.
24.스텝 13 에서 분리한 나사 (18) 1 개를 사용하여 DP 중계기판 커버
(19) 를 설치합니다 .
21.DP ケーブルカバーB(O) を取り付ける。 22.DP ケーブルカバーC(P) を DP ケーブルカバーB(O) に取り付け、手順 15

で外したビス (22)1 本で固定する。
23.手順 14 で外したビス（20)2 本で、フタ（21）を取り付ける。
24.手順 13 で外したビス (18)1 本で、DP 中継基板カバー(19) を取り付け
る。
24
A
B
B
31
Fasten the original mat.

25.Place original mat (B) with its Velcro (31) upward over the contact glass.
Align original mat (B) corner that has 90 degrees of angle with the inner left corner of the original instruction panel.
26.Close DP (A) and attach original mat (B) onto it with Velcro.
Fixer la plaque d’original.

25.Placer la plaque d’original (B) sur la vitre d’exposition, en orientant les bandes Velcro (31) vers le haut.
Aligner le coin du plateau d'original (B) faisant un angle de 90 degrés avec le coin gauche interne du panneau d'instructions d'original.
26.Abaisser le DP (A) et y fixer la plaque d’original (B) à l’aide des bandes Velcro.
Fije la alfombrilla para originales.

25.Coloque la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro (31) hacia arriba sobre el cristal de contacto.
Alinee la esquina que tiene un ángulo de 90 grados de la alfombrilla para originales (B) con la esquina interior izquierda del panel de
instrucciones para el original.
26.Cierre el DP (A) y fije la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro.
Befestigen der Originalmatte.

25.Die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband (31) nach oben über das Kontaktglas legen.
Die Ecke der Originalmatte (B), die einen 90-Grad-Winkel aufweist, mit der linken, inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten.
26.Den DP (A) schließen und die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband auf ihm befestigen.
Fissaggio del tappetino originale.

25.Posizionare il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro (31) rivolto verso l’alto sul vetro di appoggio.
Allineare l’angolo di 90 gradi del coprioriginale (B) con l’angolo interno sinistro del pannello di controllo originale.
26.Chiudere il DP (A) e applicarvi il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro.
粘贴原稿垫。
25.将原稿垫（B）放置在稿台玻璃上，并使魔术贴（31）向上。
将原稿垫（B）的 90 度角对准原稿指示板的内部左角。
26.关闭 DP（A），使原稿垫（B）粘贴到 DP 上。
원고매트 부착
25.벨크로 (31) 를 위로 향하게 하고 원고매트 (B) 를 원고대 유리판에 놓습니다 .
원고매트 (B) 는 90° 가 되어 있는 각을 원고 안내판의 좌측 안에 맞출 것 .
26.DP(A) 를 내리고 원고매트 (B) 를 DP(A) 에 부착합니다 .
原稿マットの貼り付け
25.マジックテープ (31) を上に向けて、原稿マット (B) をコンタクトガラス上に置く。
原稿マット (B) は 90° になっている角を原稿指示板の左奥に合わせること。
26.DP(A) を下ろし、原稿マット (B) を DP(A) に貼り付ける。
25
I
H
J(M3x8)
Installing the hinge cover (DP-772 only) 28.Install the right hinge cover (I) using the M3
For the DP-770(B), proceed to step 29 on page × 8 screw BLACK (J).
27.
27.Install the left hinge cover (H).
Installation des couvercles de charnière 28.Installer le couvercle de la charnière droite

(DP-772 uniquement) (l) à l'aide de la vis M3 × 8 NOIRE (J).
Pour le DP-770(B), passer à l'étape 29 de la
page 27.
27.Installer le couvercle de la charnière gauche
(H).
Instalación de la cubierta de las bisagras 28.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra derecha (I)

(DP-772 solamente) usando el tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO (J).
Para el DP-770(B), vaya al paso 29 de la página
27.
27.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda
(H).
Installieren der Scharnierabdeckung 28.Die rechte Scharnierabdeckung (I) mit der

(nur DP-772) M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ (J) anbringen.
Beim DP-770(B) gehen Sie zum Schritt 29 auf
Seite 27 weiter.
27.Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) anbrin-
gen.
Installazione del coperchio cerniera 28.Installare il coperchio cerniera destra (I) uti-
(solo DP-772) lizzando la vite M3 × 8 NERA (J).
Per DP-770(B), procedere con il punto 29 a
pagina 27.
27.Installare il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H).
安装铰链盖板（仅限 DP-772） 28.使用 1 颗 M3×8 螺丝 BLACK(J) 来安装右部铰

DP-770(B) 跳至 P27 的步骤 29。链盖板 (I)。
27.安装左部铰链盖板 (H)。
힌지커버 부착（DP-772 만） 28.나사 M3×8BLACK(J) 1 개로 우측 힌지커버

DP-770(B) 은 P27 의 순서 29 으로 진행 . (I) 를 부착합니다 .
27.좌측 힌지커버 (H) 를 부착합니다 .
ヒンジカバーの取り付け（DP-772 のみ） 28.ビス M3×8BLACK(J)1 本で右ヒンジカバー

DP-770(B) は、
P27 の手順 29 に進む。 (I) を取り付ける。
27.左ヒンジカバー(H) を取り付ける。
26
(a)
(b) K
L
B
Adhere the label 30.Adhere Label “Operation procedure” (K) of 31.Adhere Caution label “Original face up!” (L)
29.Clean the label on the original table with which the language corresponding to the of which the language corresponding to the
alcohol. destination of the MFP onto the existing destination of the MFP onto the label on the
label on the original table. Figure (a) original table. Figure (b)
Coller l’étiquette relative 30.Coller l'étiquette “Processus opératoire” (K) 31.Coller l'étiquette de mise en garde “Original
29.Avec de l'alcool, nettoyer létiquette se trou- dans la langue correspondant au destina- en haut!” (L) dans la langue correspondant
vant sur le plateau d'original. taire du MFP sur l'étiquette existante sur le au destinataire du MFP sur l'étiquette du
plateau d'original du DP. Figure (a) plateau d'original. Figure (b)
Pegue la etiqueta 30.Adhiera la etiqueta “Procedimiento opera- 31.Pegue la etiqueta de precaución “¡La cara
29.Limpie con alcohol la etiqueta de la cubierta tivo” (K) del idioma correspondiente al des- del original hacia arriba!” (L), del idioma que
de originales. tino del MFP sobre la etiqueta que se corresponde al destino del MFP, sobre la eti-
encuentra sobre la cubierta de originales. queta en la cubierta de originales. Figura (b)
Figura (a)
Anbringen des Schildes 30.Das Schild „Funktionsanweisung“ (K) in der 31.Das Warnschild „Originalschriftseite nach
29.Das Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld mit Sprache des jeweiligen Einsatzlandes des oben!“ (L) in der Sprache des jeweiligen
Alkohol reinigen. MFP auf das vorhandene Schild auf dem Einsatzlandes des MFP auf das vorhandene
Originalbedienfeld aufkleben. Abbildung (a) Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld aufkle-
ben. Abbildung (b)
Applicazione dell’etichetta 30.Far aderire l’etichetta “Procedure di funzion- 31.Far aderire l’etichetta di avvertenza “Origi-
29.Pulire con alcool l’etichetta sul piano origi- amento” (K) corrispondente alla lingua di nale rivolto verso l’alto!” (L) corrispondente
nale. destinazione dell’MFP, sull’etichetta esis- alla lingua di destinazione dell’MFP,
tente sul piano originale. Figura (a) sull’etichetta del piano originale. Figura (b)
粘贴标签 30.不需要本步骤。 31.不需要本步骤。

29.不需要本步骤。
라벨 부착 30.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 . 31.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .

29.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .
ラベルの貼り付け 30.この作業は不要。 31.この作業は不要。

29.この作業は不要。
27
20mm 20mm
c
A 20mm
B b
20mm
[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension.
3.Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprüfung]
1.Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.
[Verifica del funzionamento]

1.Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare l’originale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro.
2.Inserire la spina dell’alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa a muro, quindi posizionare l’interruttore principale su On.
3.Posizionare l’originale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l’esempio di copia.
[ 动作确认 ]
1.若要检查机器动作，准备一张 A3 原稿（a），距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线（b）并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线（c）。
2.将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。
3.在 DP 上设定原稿（a）并进行测试复印，确认机器动作和复印样本。
[ 동작확인 ]
1.기계 작동 확인을 위해서 , A3 용지 선단에서 20mm 떨어진 곳에 4 개의 선 (b) 과 센터에 1 개의 선 (c) 이 그려진 원고 (a) 를 준비 .
2.콘센트에 MFP 전원플러그를 꽂고 메인 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
3.DP 상에 원고 (a) 를 준비하고 테스트 카피를 확인하여 작동 상태와 카피 샘플를 확인합니다 .
[ 動作確認 ]
1.A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、
用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。
2.MFP の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
3.原稿 (a) を DP にセットし、テストコピーを行い、動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。
28
20mm 20mm
c
20mm A
b B
20mm
4.Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP
leading edge timing.
4.Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart.
Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
REMARQUE:Si l’image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchroni-
sation du bord d’attaque de U071.
4.Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separa-
ción.
Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincroni-
zación de borde superior U071 del DP
4.Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem
Abstandstyp durchführen.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG:Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.
4.Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il man-
uale d’istruzioni.
AVVISO: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell’immagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.
4.对比复印样本和原稿（a），如果偏移值在标准值以上时，对偏移原稿进行调整。
对 MFP 的图像确认和调整后再对 DP 的图像进行确认。详细内容请参见维修手册。
（注意）如果图像出现底灰，用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置，则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整
4.원고 (a) 와 카피 샘플을 비교하여 차이가 기준치를 벗어나는 경우 , 차이 ( 틈 ) 의 형태에 따라 다음을 조정합니다 .
MFP 의 화상확인 및 조정을 하고나서 DP 의 화상확인을 할 것 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
（주의） 화상 카브리가 발생하는 경우 , U068DP 스캔위치 조정을 합니다 . U068 에서 스캔위치를 변경한 경우 U071DP 선단 타이밍 조정을 합니다 .
4.原稿 (a) とコピーサンプルを比較し、基準値以上のずれがある場合、ずれ方に応じて調整を行う。

MFP の画像確認及び調整を行ってから DP の画像確認を行うこと。詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
（注意）画像カブリが発生する場合、U068 DP 読み取り位置の調整を行う。U068 で読み取り位置を変更した場合、U071 DP 先端タイミング調整を行う。
29
A
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 32. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 35. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 38.
Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l’ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible d’obtenir un réglage correct.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 32. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 35. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Lorsque vous utilisez l’original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l’agrandissement, de la syn-
chronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois.
Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 38.
Asegúrese de ajustar en el siguiente orden. De lo contrario, el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente.

Para verificar el ángulo del borde superior, vea la página 32. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el ángulo del borde inferior, vea la página 35. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde superior y línea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 38.
Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 32. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 35. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittel-
linie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 38.
Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 32. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 35. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Quando si utilizza l’originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell’ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale, vedere pagina 38.
必须按照以下步骤进行调整，否则不能达到准确调整的要求。
・确认前端倾斜度第 32 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
・确认后端倾斜度第 35 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
使用调整用的原稿时，可以同时自动进行等倍值，前端定时以及中心线的调整。
・通过调整用原稿进行自动调整第 38 页
반드시 하기의 순서로 조정을 할 것 . 순서대로 조정을 하지 않는 경우 바른 조정을 할 수 없습니다 .

・선단경사확인 32 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
・후단경사확인 35 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 , 등배도 , 선단타이밍 , 센터 라인의 자동조정이 한번에 수행됩니다 .
・조정용원고를 사용한 자동조정은 38 페이지 참조
必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。順序通りに調整を行わない場合、正しい調整ができない。
・先端斜め確認 32 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
両面：±4.0mm 以内
・後端斜め確認 35 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
調整用原稿を使用すると、等倍度調整、先端タイミング調整、センターライン調整の自動調整が一度におこなえる。
・調整用原稿による自動調整 38 ページ
30
A
For checking the magnification, see page41. <Reference value> Within ±1.5%
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 43. <Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm
For checking the center line, see page 45. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm;
Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm
Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 41. <Valeur de référence> ±1,5% max.
Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 43. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max.
Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 45. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.;
Copie recto verso: ±3,0 mm max.
Para verificar el cambio de tamaño, vea la página 41. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±1,5 %
Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 43. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm
Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 45. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 41. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 %
Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 43. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 45. <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm;
Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Per controllare l’ingrandimento, vedere pagina 41. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±1,5%
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 43. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm
Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 45. <Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm
・确认等倍值第 41 页 < 标准值 > ±1.5% 以内

・确认前端定时调整第 43 页 < 标准值 > ±2.5mm 以内
・确认中心线第 45 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±2.0mm 以内，
双面：±3.0mm 以内
・등배도 확인 41 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±1.5% 이내

・선단 타이밍 확인 43 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±2.5mm 이내
・센터 라인확인 45 페이지 ＜기준치＞ 단면：±2.0mm 이내 ,
양면：±3.0mm 이내
・等倍度確認 41 ページ＜基準値＞ ±1.5% 以内

・先端タイミング確認 43 ページ＜基準値＞ ±2.5mm 以内
・センターライン確認 45 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±2.0mm 以内、
31
A
[Checking the angle of leading edge]

1.Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
[Vérification de l’angle du bord avant]

1.Vérifier l’écart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de
référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde superior]

1.Compruebe la separación horizontal entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante]

1.Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer
als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo principale]

1.Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) delle posizioni dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il
valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
[ 确认前端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内。
　　　　　双面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内。
[ 선단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±4.0mm 이내
[ 先端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
＜基準値＞片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：±4.0mm 以内
32
C (C*)
A
G
G
G B
C (C*)
C
2. DP-770(B): Remove the angle control fitting (D). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G) on the left and right fixing fittings (C).
DP-772: Remove the left hinge cover (H) and the angle control fitting (D). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G) on the left and right fixing fittings (C)(C*)
3.Turn adjusting screw (3) at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example (d): Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise and move the DP to the inner side.
For copy example (e): Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1.0 mm
4.Perform a test copy.
2. DP-770(B): Déposer la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (D). Desserrer les 2 vis TP M4 × 14 (G) sur les fixations gauche et droite (C).
DP-772: Déposer le couvercle de la charnière gauche (H) et la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (D). Desserrer les 2 vis TP M4 × 14 (G) sur les fixations
gauche et droite (C)(C*).
3. Tourner la vis de réglage (3) à l’arrière de la charnière droite pour régler la position du DP.
Pour l’exemple de copie (d) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’intérieur.
Pour l’exemple de copie (e) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’avant.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : environ 1,0 mm
4. Effectuer une copie de test.
2. DP-770(B): quite el herraje de control de ángulo (D). Afloje los 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y derecho (C).
DP-772: quite la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda (H) y el herraje de control de ángulo (D). Afloje los 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y dere-
cho (C)(C*).
3. Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha para ajustar la posición del DP.
Para el ejemplo de copia (d): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido antihorario y mueva el DP al lado interno.
Para el ejemplo de copia (e): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido horario y mueva el DP al lado frontal.
Magnitud del cambio por escala: aprox. 1,0 mm
4. Haga una copia de prueba.
2. DP-770(B): Die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterung (C) lösen.
DP-772: Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalter-
ungen (C)(C*) lösen.
3. Die Einstellschraube (3) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einstellen, um die DP-Position einzustellen.
Kopierbeispiel (d): Die Einstellschraube nach links drehen und den DP nach innen schieben.
Kopierbeispiel (e): Die Einstellschraube nach rechts drehen und den DP nach vorne schieben.
Änderung pro Maßstab: Ungefähr 1,0 mm
4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.
2. DP-770(B): Rimuovere l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (D). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G) sugli accessori di fissaggio (C) destro e sinistro.
DP-772: Rimuovere il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H) e l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (D). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G) sui lati destro e sinistro degli accessori di
fissaggio (C)(C*) destro e sinistro.
3. Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra per regolare la posizione del DP.
Per l’esempio di copia (d): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso antiorario e spostare il DP verso l’interno.
Per l’esempio di copia (e): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso orario e spostare il DP in avanti.
Entità modifica per scala: circa 1,0 mm
4. Eseguire una copia di prova.
2.DP-770(B) 时：拆下角度限制工具 (D)。拧松左右固定工具 (C) 的 2 颗 M4x14TP(G) 螺丝。

DP-772 时：拆下左部铰链盖板 (H) 以及角度限制工具 (D)。拧松左右固定工具 (C)(C*) 的 2 颗 M4x14TP(G) 螺丝。
3.旋转右部铰链的后部的调整螺钉（3）以调整 DP 位置。
对于复印样本 (d) ：逆时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到内侧。　对于复印样本 (e) ：顺时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到正面。
按比例尺的更改量：约 1.0mm
4.进行测试复印。
2.DP-770(B) 의 경우：각도 고정쇠 (D) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (C) 나사 M4x14TP(G) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 .
DP-772 의 경우：좌 힌지커버 (H) 및 각도 고정쇠 (D) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (C)(C*) 의 나사 M4x14TP(G) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 .
3.우 힌지 뒷측 조정나사 (3) 를 돌려 DP 의 위치를 조정합니다 .
샘플 카피 (d) 의 경우：조정나사를 좌로 돌려 DP 를 안으로 넣습니다 . 샘플 카피 (e) 의 경우 ： 조정나사를 오른쪽으로 돌려 DP 를 앞으로 뺍니다 .
1 개 변화량：약 1.0mm
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
2.DP-770(B) の場合：角度規制金具 (D) を取り外す。左右の固定金具 (C) のビス M4x14TP(G)2 本を緩める

DP-772 の場合：左ヒンジカバー(H) および角度規制金具 (D) を取り外す。左右の固定金具 (C)(C*) のビス M4x14TP(G)2 本を緩める。
3.右ヒンジ後側の調整ビス (3) を回し、DP の位置を調整する。
コピーサンプル (d) の場合：調整ビスを左に回し、 DP を奥へ動かす。
コピーサンプル (e) の場合：調整ビスを右に回し、 DP を手前へ動かす。
1 目盛り当たりの変化量：約 1.0mm
4.テストコピーを行う。
33
A
5.Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
6.After adjustment is completed, retighten two M4 × 14TP screws (G) that have been loosened in step 2.
7.Remove the original mat (B) and refit it (see steps 23 and 24 on page 10) (see steps 25 and 26 on page 25).
5.Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
6.Une fois le réglage effectué, resserrer les deux vis TP M4 × 14 (G) desserrées à l’étape 2.
7.Retirez le tapis d’original (B) et remettez-le en place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 23 et 24 à la page 10) (Reportez-vous aux étapes 25 et 26 à la page
25).
5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
6.Una vez hecho el ajuste, vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) que ha aflojado en el paso 2.
7.Desmonte la plancha de original (B) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 23 y 24 en la página 10) (vea los pasos 25 y 26 en la página 25).
5.Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
6.Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G), die in Schritt 2 gelöst wurden, wieder festziehen.
7.Die Originalmatte (B) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 23 und 24 auf Seite 10) (siehe Schritte 25 und 26 auf Seite 25).
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti.
<Valore di riferimento> Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
6.Una volta conclusa la regolazione, serrare nuovamente le viti M4 × 14TP (G) che erano state allentate al Punto 2.
7.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (B) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 23 e 24 a pagina 10) (vedere i passi 25 e 26 a pagina 25).
5.重复上述步骤直至复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值达到标准值范围内。
< 标准值 > 单面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　双面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内
6.调整完成后，重新拧紧在步骤 2 中松开的两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝（G）。
7.拆下原稿垫（B），参照第 10 页的步骤 23 和 24 或第 25 页的步骤 25 和 26 再次装上。
5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 조정을 반복합니다 .

＜기준치＞단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
　　　　　양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±4.0mm 이내
6.조정종료 후 순서 2 에서 느슨하게 한 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개를 조입니다 .
7.원고매트 (B) 를 제거하고 10 페이지 순서 23, 24 및 25 페이지 순서 25, 26 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで、調整を繰り返す。

＜基準値＞片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：±4.0mm 以内
6.調整終了後、手順 2 で緩めたビス M4×14TP(G)2 本を締め付ける。
7.原稿マット (B) を取り外し、10 ページの手順 23、24 あるいは、
25 ページの手順 25、26 を参考に再度取り付ける。
34
A
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
[Checking the angle of trailing edge]

1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustment.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
[Vérification de l’angle du bord arrière]

1.Vérifiez l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart est supérieur à la valeur de référence, effectuez le
réglage suivant.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde inferior]

1.Verifique la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de la copia de muestra. Si la superación supera el valor de referencia, haga el
siguiente ajuste.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante]

1.Die Abweichung der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopienmusters prüfen. Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert, ist die fol-
gende Einstellung durchzuführen.
<Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo di uscita]

1.Controllare la differenza tra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) della copia di esempio. Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento, effettuare
la seguente regolazione.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm
[ 确认后端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值。如果超过标准值时，必须进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面时：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　双面时：±4.0mm 以内
[ 후단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0m 이내
양면의 경우：±4.0mm 이내
[ 後端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞片面の場合：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　両面の場合：±4.0mm 以内
35
3
5
A
B 9
10
7
4
2.Open the upper cover (3) of the DP (A). 4.Adjust the height of DP. Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5
3.Remove the 3 TP screws (4) and the screw Loosen the nut (8). mm (10)
(5), and remove the strap (6) from the rear For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting Retighten the nut (8).
cover (7). Then remove the DP (A) rear screw (9). 5.Refit the rear cover (7) removed in step 3.
cover (7). For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting 6.Remove the original mat (B) and refit it (see
screw (9). steps 23 and 24 on page 10)(see steps 25
and 26 on page 25).
Quantité de changement par pas: Environ 0,5

2.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (3) du DP (A) 4.Réglez la hauteur du DP.
mm (10)
3.Déposer les 3 vis TP (4) et la vis (5) puis Desserrez l’écrou (8).
Resserrez l’écrou (8).
déposer la courroie (6) du couvercle arrière Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis
5. Reposer le couvercle arrière (7) déposé à l'étape 3.
(7). Déposer ensuite le couvercle arrière (7) de réglage (9).
6. Retirez le tapis d’original (B) et remettez-le en
du DP (A). Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de
place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 23 et 24 à la
réglage (9). page 10)(Reportez-vous aux étapes25 et 26 à la
page 25).
2.Abra la cubierta superior (3) del DP (A). 4.Ajuste la altura del DP. Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (10)
3.Quite los 3 tornillos TP (4) y el tornillo (5) y Afloje la tuerca (8). Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (8).
quite la correa (6) de la cubierta trasera (7). Para la copia de muestra (f): Afloje el tornillo 5. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (7) desmontada en
Después, quite la cubierta trasera (7) del DP de ajuste (9). el paso 3.
(A). Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el 6. Desmonte la plancha de original (B) y vuelva a
tornillo de ajuste (9). colocar (vea los pasos 23 y 24 en la página
10)(vea los pasos 25 y 26 en la página 25).
Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 0,5 mm
2.Die obere Abdeckung (3) des DP (A) öffnen. 4.Die Höhe des DP einstellen.
(10)
3.Die 3 TP-Schrauben (4) und die Schraube Lösen Sie die Mutter (8).
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (8) wieder fest.
(5) entfernen und den Riemen (6) von der Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Ein-
5. Die in Schritt 3 entfernte hintere Abdeckung (7)
hinteren Abdeckung (7) abnehmen. Dann stellschraube (9).
wieder anbringen.
die hintere Abdeckung (7) des DP (A) Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube
6. Die Originalmatte (B) abnehmen und wieder anbrin-
abnehmen. (9) festziehen. gen (siehe Schritte 23 und 24 auf Seite 10)
(siehe Schritte 25und 26 auf Seite 25).
2.Aprire il pannello superiore (3) del DP (A). 4.Regolazione dell’altezza del DP Variazione graduale: Circa 0,5 mm (10)
3.Rimuovere le 3 viti TP (4) e la vite (5), e Allentare il dado (8). Stringere di nuovo il dado (8).
quindi rimuovere la cinghietta (6) dal coper- Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite 5.Reinserire il coperchio posteriore (7)
chio posteriore (7). Quindi rimuovere il di regolazione (9). rimosso nel passo 3.
coperchio posteriore (7) del DP (A). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite 6.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (B) e reinserirlo
di regolazione (9). (vedere i passi 23 e 24 a pagina 10)(vedere i
passi 25 e 26 a pagina 25).
2.打开 DP（A）的上盖板（3）。 4.调整 DP 的高度。每 1 格的移动量：约 0.5mm（10）

3.拆除 3 颗 TP 螺丝 (4) 和 1 颗螺丝 (5)，将塑松驰螺母（8）。将螺母（8）按原样紧固好。
料片 (6) 从后盖板 (7) 上拆除，拆下 DP 主机复印样张（f）时：松弛调整螺丝（9）。 5.重新安装在步骤 3 中拆下的后盖板（7）。
(A) 的后盖板 (7)。复印样张（g）时：紧固调整螺丝（9）。 6.拆下原稿垫（B），参照第 10 页的步骤 23 和
24 或第 25 页的步骤 25 和 26 再次装上。
2.DP(A) 의 DP 윗 커버 (3) 를 엽니다 . 4.DP 의 높이를 조정합니다 . 1 개 변화량：약 0.5mm(10)

3.TP 나사 (4) 3 개와 나사 (5) 1 개를 제거하고 너트 (8) 를 느슨하게 합니다 . 너트 (8) 를 원래대로 조입니다 .
스트랩 (6) 을 뒷면 커버 (7) 에서 제거해 샘플 카피 (f) 의 경우：조정나사 (9) 를 느슨 5.순서 3 에서 제거한 뒷 커버 (7) 를 원래대로
DP(A) 의후면 커버 (7) 를 제거합니다 . 하게 합니다 . 장착합니다 .
샘플 카피 (g) 의 경우：조정나사 (9) 를 조입 6.원고매트 (B) 를 제거하고 10 페이지 순서
니다 . 23, 24 및 25 페이지 순서 25, 26 을 참고로
다시 부착합니다 .
2.DP(A) の DP 上カバー(3) を開く。 4.DP の高さを調整する。 1 目盛り当たりの変化量：約 0.5mm(10)

3.TP ビス (4)3 本とビス (5)1 本を外し、ストナット (8) をゆるめる。ナット (8) を元通り締める。
ラップ (6) を後カバー(7) から外して、コピーサンプル (f) の場合：調整ビス (9) を 5.手順 3 で取り外した後カバー(7) を元通り
DP(A) の後カバー(7) を取り外す。ゆるめる。取り付ける。
コピーサンプル (g) の場合：調整ビス (9) を 6.原稿マット (B) を取り外し、10 ページの手
締める。順 23、24 あるいは、
25 ページの手順 25、26
を参考に再度取り付ける。
36
A
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
7.Make a proof copy again.

8.Repeat steps 1 to 6 until line (2) of copy example shows the following the reference values.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
7.Effectuez à nouveau une copie de test.

8.Répétez les étapes 1 à 6 jusqu’à ce que la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de référence suivantes.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.
7.Haga otra copia de prueba.

8.Repita los pasos 1 a 6 hasta que la línea (2) de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm
7.Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen.

8.Die Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen, bis die Linie (2) des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm
7.Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia.

8.Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la linea (2) dell’esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm
7.再次进行测试复印。
8.反复操作步骤 1~6，直至复印样张的线（2）为标准值内。
< 标准值 > 单面时：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　双面时：±4.0mm 以内
7.다시 테스트 카피를 합니다 .

8.샘플 카피 선 (2) 이 기준치내로 될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 6 을 반복합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0m 이내
양면의 경우：±4.0mm 이내
7.再度テストコピーをおこなう。
8.コピーサンプルの線 (2) が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ～ 6 を繰り返す。
＜基準値＞片面の場合：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　両面の場合：±4.0mm 以内
37
A
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 4.Set the original on the DP face down and press the Start key to carry
If there is no DP auto adjustment original. out rear-side adjustment.(DP-772 only)
1.Set the maintenance mode U411, select [DP Auto Adj] and press the 5.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
Start key to print an original. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
2.Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. position and repeat steps 2 and 4 until OK appears.
3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out For details, see the service manual.
surface adjustment.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage] 4. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en bas et appuyer sur la touche Start pour
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP procéder au réglage du côté arrière. (DP-772 uniquement)
1. Régler le mode maintenance U411, sélectionner [DP Auto Adj] et appuyer sur la 5. Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le message
touche Start pour imprimer un original. ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérififer la position de
2. Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyer sur la l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 4 jusqu'à ce que le message OK
touche Start. apparaisse.
3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la touche Start Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 4. Coloque el original en el DP cara abajo y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP ajuste de reverso. (DP-772 solamente)
1. Entre al modo de mantenimiento U441, seleccione [DP Auto Adj] y pulse la tecla 5.Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
de Start para imprimir un original. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
2. Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla de Start. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 4 hasta que aparezca OK en
3. Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un la pantalla.
ajuste de anverso. Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 4. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach unten einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti-
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist gen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen. (nur DP-772 )
1. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. DP [Auto Adj] wählen und die Start-Taste 5. Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn
betätigen, um ein Original auszudrucken. ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen.
2. Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start-Taste betäti- Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 4,
gen. bis OK angezeigt wird.
3. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
gen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale] 4. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso il basso e premere il tasto di Start per
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore. ( Solo DP-772 )
1. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, selezionare [DP Auto Adj] e premere 5. Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare ERROR XX
il tasto di Start per stampare un originale. (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazi-
2. Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il tasto di Start. one dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 4
3. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di Start per fino a quando appare OK.
eseguire la regolazione della superficie. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
[ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 ] 4.将原稿面朝下放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行反面的调整。( 仅限

没有 DP 调整用原稿时 DP-772)
1.设置维护模式 U411，按 [DP Auto Adj]、Start 键以输出原稿。 5.如果屏幕上出现 OK（完成），则表示调整完成。
2.将输出的原稿放在稿台上，按 Start 键。如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
3.将原稿面朝上放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行正面的调整。重复步骤 2 和 4，直到 OK（完成）出现。
详细内容请参照维修手册。
[ 조정용 원고를 이용한 자동조정 ] 4.원고를 FaceDown 으로 DP 에 장착하고 시작키를 눌러 뒷면조정을 합

DP 조정용 원고가 없는 경우 니다 . (DP-772 만 )
1. 메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP Auto Adj], 시작키를 눌러 원고를 5.디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
출력합니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
2. 출력한 원고를 원고 유리에 장착하고 시작키를 누릅니다 . 인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다 .
3. 원고를 FaceUp 으로 DP 로 세트하고 시작키를 눌러 표면조정을 합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
[ 調整用原稿による自動調整 ] 4.原稿を FaceDown で DP へセットし、Start キーを押し、裏面の調整を行

DP 調整用原稿が無い場合う。(DP-772 のみ )
1.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 [DP Auto Adj]、Start キーを押 5.ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。
し原稿を出力する。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
2.出力した原稿をコンタクトガラス上にセットし、Start キーを押す。認し、OK が表示されるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を繰り返す。
3.原稿を FaceUp で DP へセットし、
Start キーを押し、表面の調整を行詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
う。
38
5mm
A
F 149 1mm B
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
1.Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until OK appears.
2.Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FaceUp (Chart2)], For details, see the service manual.
[Input] and the Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1.Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplace- fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message OK apparaisse.
2.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
FaceUp (Chart2)], [Input] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au
réglage de la surface.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3.Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
1.Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca OK en
2.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP la pantalla.
FaceUp (Chart2)], [Input] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
el ajuste de anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1.F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set- lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis OK angezeigt wird.
2.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP Faceup (Chart2)], [Input] Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
und die Start-Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberfläche-
neinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
1.Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e dis- ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
porre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare OK.
FaceUp (Chart2)], [Input] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
della superficie.
使用 DP 自动调整用稿时 3.如果屏幕上出现 OK（完成），则表示调整完成。

1.将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向上，并把标有 F 和 R 的一侧插入 DP 来设如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
定原稿。重复步骤 1 和 2，直到 OK（完成）出现。
2.设置维护模式 U411，按顺序按 [DP FaceUp(Chart2)]、[Input]、Start 详细内容请参照维修手册。
键以进行正面的调整。
DP 자동조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 3.디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .

1.DP 자동 조정 원고를 F, R 을 위로 향하게 하고 F, R 이라고 표시된 곳 ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
에서 부터 원고를 셋팅합니다 . 인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 2 를 반복합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FaceUp(Chart2)], [Input], 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
시작키의 순서로 눌러 표면 조정을 합니다 .
DP 自動調整原稿を使用する場合 3.ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。

1.DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を上に向け、F、
R が書かれている方から DP へ ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
セットする。認し、OK が表示されるまで手順 1 ～ 2 を繰り返す
2.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 [DP FaceUp(Chart2)]、[Input]、詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
Start キーの順に押し、表面の調整を行う。
39
5mm
A
B F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
4.After completing the surface adjustment, direct F and R of the DP auto 6.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.(DP-772
adjustment original downward and set the original by inserting the side only)
where the F and R are marked into the DP first. (DP-772 only) If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
5. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FaceDown (Chart2)], position and repeat steps 4 and 5 until OK appears.
[Normal Target], [Input] and the Start key in that order to carry out rear- For details, see the service manual.
side adjustment.(DP-772 only)
4.Une fois le réglage de la surface effectué, diriger F (avant) et R (arri- 6.Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé. ( DP-
ère) de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP vers le bas 772 uniquement)
et placer l’original en introduisant en premier dans le DP le côté sur Si le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué.
lequel F et R sont indiqués.( DP-772 uniquement) Vérififer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 4 et 5
5.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP jusqu'à ce que le message OK apparaisse.
FaceDown (Chart2)], [Normal Target], [Input] et Start dans cet ordre Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
pour procéder au réglage du côté arrière.( DP-772 uniquement)
4.Una vez hecho el ajuste del anverso, dirija F y R del original de ajuste 6.Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
automático del DP hacia abajo y coloque el original insertando en el (DP-772 solamente )
DP, en primer lugar, el lado en el que están marcados F y R.(DP-772 Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
solamente ) ajustada del original y repita los pasos 4 y 5 hasta que aparezca OK en
5.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP Face- la pantalla.
Down (Chart2)], [Normal Target], [Input] y la tecla de Start, en ese Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
orden, para realizar el ajuste de reverso.(DP-772 solamente )
4.Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automa- 6.Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
tischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das sen. (nur DP-772)
Original einstellen, indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung
DP eingeführt wird.(nur DP-772) fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wieder-
5. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FaceDown (Chart2)], [Normal holen Sie Schritte 4 und 5, bis OK angezeigt wird.
Target], [Input] und die Start-Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.(nur DP-772)
4.Una volta conclusa la regolazione della superficie, orientare F e R 6.Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata. ( Solo DP-772 )
dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso il basso e disporre l’originale Se compare ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita.
inserendo nel DP prima il lato su cui sono contrassegnati F e R.( Solo Verificare la posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le opera-
DP-772 ) zioni 4 e 5 fino a quando appare OK.
5.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
FaceDown (Chart2)], [Normal Target], [Input] e il tasto di Start, per
eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore.( Solo DP-772 )
4.完成正面调整后，将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向下，并首先将标有 F 和 6.如果屏幕上出现 OK（完成），则表示调整完成。 ( 仅限 DP-772)

R 的一侧插入 DP 来设定原稿。( 仅限 DP-772) 如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
5.设置维护模式 U411，按顺序按 [DP FaceDown(Chart2)]、[Normal 重复步骤 4 和 5，直到 OK（完成）出现。
Taget]、[Input]、Start 键以进行反面的调整。( 仅限 DP-772) 详细内容请参照维修手册。
4.표면의 조정완료 후 DP 자동조정원고의 F, R 을 아래로 향하게 해 F, R 6.디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 . (DP-772 만 )
이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에서 DP 로 세트합니다 . (DP-772 만 ) ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
5.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FaceDown(Chart2)], 인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 4 ～ 5 를 반복합니다 .
[Normal Taget], [Input], 시작키 순서로 뒷면조정을 합니다 . (DP- 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조
772 만 )
4.表面の調整完了後、 DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を下に向け、 F、R が書かれて 6.ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。 (DP-772 のみ )

いる方から DP へセットする。 (DP-772 のみ ) ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
5.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 [DP FaceDown(Chart2)]、認し、OK が表示されるまで手順 4 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
[Normal Taget]、[Input]、Start キーの順に押し、裏面の調整を行う。詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
(DP-772 のみ )
40
X X'
X' X
A
3 3
X
X'
2 X'
X B
2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
[Checking the magnification] 2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy Sub Scan(F): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Sub Scan(B): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (rear side)
according to the following procedure. (DP-770(B))
Main Scan(CIS):Adjusts the scanner CIS main-scan magnification (DP-
<Reference value>
772)
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5% Sub Scan (CIS): Adjusts the scanner CIS sub-scan magnification (DP-
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5% 772)
[Vérification de l’agrandissement] 2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.
1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exem- Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scanner(surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Sub Scan(B): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scanner (arrière)(DP-
procédure suivante. 770(B))
<Valeur de référence> Main Scan(CIS):Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage principal du CIS du scanner (DP-772)
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est de ±1,5% Sub Scan (CIS): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du CIS du scanner (DP-
Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est de ±1,5% 772)
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2. Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
Sub Scan(F): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria del
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) escáner.(anverso)
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, Sub Scan(B): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria del escáner
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. (reverso) (DP-770(B))
<Valor de referencia> Main Scan(CIS):Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración principal CIS del escáner
(DP-772)
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5% Sub Scan (CIS): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria CIS del
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5% escáner (DP-772)
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2. Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Sub Scan(B): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Rückseite)(DP-770(B))
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Main Scan(CIS):Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Mainscan-Vergrößerung (DP-772)
<Bezugswert> Sub Scan (CIS): Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Subscan-Vergrößerung (DP-772)
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5%
[Controllo dell’ingrandimento] Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (3) deve essere
1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo compreso fra ±1,5%
scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa proce- 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
dura. Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner(superficie)
<Valore di riferimento> Sub Scan(B): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner(lato posteriore)(DP-
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della linea (2) deve essere com- 770(B))
preso fra ±1,5% Main Scan(CIS):Regola l'ingrandimento di CIS main-scan dello scanner. (DP-772)
Sub Scan (CIS): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare CIS dello scanner (DP-772)
[ 确认等倍值 ] 2.使用维修模式 U070 调整等倍值。

1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值。 Sub Scan(F) ：读取副扫描等倍度的调整（正面）
如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Sub Scan(B) ：读取副扫描等倍度的调整（反面）(DP-770(B))
< 标准值 > Main Scan(CIS) ：CIS 的读取主扫描等倍度的调整 (DP-772)
对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内 Sub Scan(CIS) ：CIS 的读取副扫描等倍度的调整 (DP-772)
对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
[ 등배도확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U070 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2)(3) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Sub Scan(F)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（표면）
차이가 기준이외의 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Sub Scan(B)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（뒷면）(DP-770(B))
＜기준치＞ Main Scan(CIS):CIS 의 스캔 주주사 등배도의 조정 (DP-772)
부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내 Sub Scan(CIS)：CIS 의 스캔 부주사 등배도의 조정 (DP-772)
주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
[ 等倍度確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U070 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。 Sub Scan(F)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 表面 )
ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Sub Scan(B)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 裏面 )(DP-770(B))
＜基準値＞ Main Scan(CIS)：CIS の読み取り主走査等倍度の調整 (DP-772)
副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内 Sub Scan(CIS)：CIS の読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 (DP-772)
主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
41
X X'
X' X
A
3 3
B X
X'
X'
X
2 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3.Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. example shows the reference value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.10 % For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
4.Perform a test copy. For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) : l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2)
diminuer la valeur. est de ±1,5%
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,10 % Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3)
4.Effectuer une copie de test. est de ±1,5%
3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,10 % Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la
4.Haga una copia de prueba. línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la
línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen. Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. <Bezugswert>
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,10 % Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen. Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
±1,5%
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento

Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (h)(j): aumenta il valore. della linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento.
Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (i)(k): riduce il valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,10 % Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale
4.Eseguire una copia di prova della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzon-
tale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4，直至复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值达

在长度偏短时复印样本（h）（j）：调高设定值到标准值范围内。
在长度偏长时复印样本（i）（k）：调低设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.10% 对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内
4.进行测试复印。对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 선 (2)(3) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합

길이가 짧은 경우 샘플 카피 (h)(j)：설정치를 높입니다 . 니다 .
길이가 긴 경우 샘플 카피 (i)(k)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.10% 부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 . 주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4

長さが短い場合コピーサンプル (h)(j)：設定値を上げるを繰り返す。
長さが長い場合コピーサンプル (i)(k)：設定値を下げる＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.10% 副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
42
2.5mm
2.5mm A
2
2 B
1
a l m
[Checking the leading edge timing] 2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
according to the following procedure. CIS Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing for CIS scanning.(DP-772)
<Reference value> CIS Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing for CIS scanning.(DP-772)
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm Back Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (rear side)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (rear side)(DP-770(B))
[Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant] 2. Pour régler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exem- Front Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Front Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (surface)
procédure suivante. CIS Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête pour le balayage par le CIS.(DP-772)
<Valeur de référence> CIS Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière pour le balayage par le CIS.(DP-772)
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm Back Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (arrière)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (arrière)(DP-770(B))
[Cambio de la sincronización de borde superior] 2.Para ajustar la sincronización utilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Front Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (anverso).
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, Front Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. CIS Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior para exploración CIS.(DP-772)
<Valor de referencia> CIS Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior para exploración CIS.(DP-772)
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm Back Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (reverso).(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (reverso).(DP-770(B))
[Überprüfen des Vorderkanten-Timings] 2.Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. CIS Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.(DP-772)
<Bezugswert> CIS Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.(DP-772)
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm Back Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Rückseite)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Rückseite)(DP-770(B))
[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea (2) sincronizzazione.
Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento,
Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. CIS Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale per scansione CIS.(DP-772)
<Valore di riferimento> CIS Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita per scansione CIS.(DP-772)
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm Back Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (lato posteriore)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (lato posteriore)(DP-770(B))
[ 确认前端定时调整 ] 2.使用维修模式 U071 调整定时。

1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front Head ：调整前端定时 ( 正面 )
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Front Tail ：调整后端定时 ( 正面 )
< 标准值 > CIS Head ：调整 CIS 读取时的前段对位 (DP-772)
线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内 CIS Tail ：调整 CIS 读取时的后端定时 (DP-772)
Back Head ：调整前端定时 ( 反面 )(DP-770(B))
Back Tail ：调整后端定时 ( 反面 )(DP-770(B))
[ 선단 타이밍확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U071 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .
1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준 Front Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Front Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
＜기준치＞ CIS Head： CIS 스캔 시의 선단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .(DP-772)
선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내 CIS Tail： CIS 스캔 시의 후단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .(DP-772)
Back Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .(DP-770(B))
Back Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .(DP-770(B))
[ 先端タイミング確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U071 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれ Front Head ：先端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
が基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Front Tail ：後端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
＜基準値＞ CIS Head： CIS 読み込み時の先端タイミングを調整する (DP-772)
線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内 CIS Tail： CIS 読み込み時の後端タイミングを調整する (DP-772)
Back Head：先端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する (DP-770(B))
Back Tail：後端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する (DP-770(B))
43
2.5mm
A 2.5mm
2
B 2
1
a l m
3.Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
For the faster leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the shows the reference value.
value. <Reference value>
For the slower leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
value.
Amount of change per step: 0.17 mm
4.Perform a test copy.
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,17 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
copia (l): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
(m): aumenta el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,17 mm
4.Haga una copia de prueba.
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert ver- Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
ringern. <Bezugswert>
Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
erhöhen.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,17 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scosta-

Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (l): mento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferi-
riduce il valore. mento.
Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (m): <Valore di riferimento>
aumenta il valore. Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
Entità modifica per passo: 0,17 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova
3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4，直至复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值达到标准值范

在前端定时偏快时复印样本（l）：调低设定值围内。
在前端定时偏慢时复印样本（m）：调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.17mm 线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다

선단 타이밍이 빠른 경우 샘플 카피 (l)：설정치를 내립니다 . .
선단 타이밍이 늦은 경우 샘플 카피 (m)：설정치를 올립니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.17mm 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を繰

先端タイミングが早い場合コピーサンプル (l)：設定値を下げる。り返す。
先端タイミングが遅い場合コピーサンプル (m)：設定値を上げる。＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.17mm 線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内
44
2mm/3mm 2mm/3mm
B
1 2 2
a n o
[Checking the center line] 2.Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the Back: Adjusts the center line (rear side)
gap according to the following procedure. CIS: Adjusts the CIS center line (DP-/772)
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
[Vérification de la ligne médiane] 2.Pour régler la ligne médiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre l’axe (1) de l’original (a) et l’axe (2) de l’exemple de Front: Permet de régler l'axe (surface)
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- Back: Permet de régler l'axe (arrière)
dure suivante. CIS: Permet de régler l'axe du CIS (DP-772)
<Valeur de référence>
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
[Verificación de la línea central] Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y ±3,0 mm
la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el 2.Para ajustar la línea central utilice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Front: ajusta la línea central (anverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back: ajusta la línea central (reverso).
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una CIS: ajusta la línea central CIS (DP-772)
cara: ±2,0 mm
[Überprüfen der Mittellinie] 2.Zum Einstellen der Mittellinie den Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mit- Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberfläche)
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Back: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Rückseite)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. CIS: Zur Einstellung der CIS-Mittellinie (DP-772)
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
[Controllo della linea centrale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di Back: Regola la linea centrale (lato posteriore)
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. CIS: Regola la linea centrale CIS (DP-772)
<Valore di riferimento>
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
[ 确认中心线 ] 2.使用维修模式 U072 调整中心线。

1.确认原稿（a）中心线（1）和复印样本中心线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front ：中心位置（正面）的调整
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Back ：中心位置（反面）的调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内 CIS ：CIS 的中心位置的调整 (DP-772)
　　　　　双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
[ 센터 라인 확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U072 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 센터라인 (1) 과 샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 Front：센터 위치（표면）의 조정
. 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정합니다 . Back：센터 위치（뒷면）의 조정
＜기준치＞단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±2.0mm 이내 CIS：CIS 의 센터 위치조정 (DP-772)
양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
[ センターライン確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U072 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の中心線 (1) とコピーサンプルの中心線 (2) のずれを確認す Front：センター位置（表面）の調整
る。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Back：センター位置（裏面）の調整
＜基準値＞片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内 CIS：CIS のセンター位置の調整 (DP-772)
　　　　　両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
45
2mm/3mm 2mm/3mm
B
1 2 2
a n o
3. Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
If the center moves more front, copy example (n): Increases the value. shows the reference value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
4. Perform a test copy. Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour l’exemple de copie (n) dont l’axe se déplace davantage vers l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
l’avant : augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie (o) dont l’axe se déplace vers l’intérieur : Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
diminuer la valeur. Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,085 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n): (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
aumenta el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (0): disminuye Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
el valor. cara: ±2,0 mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
4.Haga una copia de prueba. ±3,0 mm
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
erhöhen. <Bezugswert>
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
verringern. Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,085 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo

Se il centro si sposta più avanti, esempio di copia (n): aumenta il scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di
valore. riferimento.
Se il centro si sposta verso l’interno, esempio di copia (o): riduce il <Valore di riferimento>
valore. Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Entità modifica per passo: 0,085 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova
3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4，直至复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值达到标准值范

当中心向前偏移时复印样本（n）：调高设定值围内。
当中心向内偏移时复印样本（o）：调低设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.085mm 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 차이가 기준치 내가 될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를

센터가 바로 앞으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (n)：설정치를 높입니다 . 반복합니다 .
센터가 안으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (o) : 설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.085mm 단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 죄우차이：±2.0mm 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 . 양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの中心線 (2) ずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を

センターが手前にずれている場合コピーサンプル (n)：設定値を上げ繰り返す。
る。＜基準値＞
センターが奥にずれている場合コピーサンプル (o) 設定値を下げる。片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.085mm 両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
46
2014.4
303P256730-01
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited
Headquarters 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road
225 Sand Road, Tsuenwan, NT, Hong Kong
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA Phone: +852-2610-2181
Phone: +1-973-808-8444 Fax: +852-2610-2063
Fax: +1-973-882-6000
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Latin America (China) Corporation
8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100 8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,
Miami, Florida 33166, USA Shanghai,200003, China
Phone: +1-305-421-6640 Phone: +86-21-5301-1777
Fax: +1-305-421-6666 Fax: +86-21-5302-8300

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd. (Thailand) Corp., Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,
335 Ratchadapisek Road, Bangsue, Bangkok 10800,
Canada
Thailand
Phone: +1-905-670-4425
Phone: +66-2-586-0333
Fax: +1-905-670-8116
Fax: +66-2-586-0278

Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,
Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco
Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118
Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,
Phone: +65-6741-8733
Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México
Fax: +65-6748-3788
Phone: +52-555-383-2741
Fax: +52-555-383-7804
Hong Kong Limited
KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda. 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road
Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás, Tsuenwan, NT, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-3582-4000
Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba-SP, CEP 06543-306,
Fax: +852-3185-1399
Brazil
Phone: +55-11-4195-8496
Fax: +55-11-4195-6167 KYOCERA Document Solutions
Taiwan Corporation
6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,
KYOCERA Document Solutions Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.
Australia Pty. Ltd. Phone: +886-2-2507-6709
Fax: +886-2-2507-8432
Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-9999 KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.
Fax: +61-2-9888-9588 18F, Kangnam bldg, 1321-1,
Seocho-Dong, Seocho-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone: +822-6933-4050
KYOCERA Document Solutions Fax: +822-747-0084
New Zealand Ltd.
Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,
New Zealand India Private Limited
Phone: +64-9-415-4517 First Floor, ORCHID CENTRE
Fax: +64-9-415-4597 Sector-53, Golf Course Road, Gurgaon 122 002,
India
Phone: +91-0124-4671000
Fax: +91-0124-4671001
KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V. KYOCERA Document Solutions
Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp, Deutschland GmbH
The Netherlands
Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,
Phone: +31-20-654-0000
Germany
Fax: +31-20-653-1256
Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +49-2159-918100
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.
Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk, KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH
The Netherlands
Eduard-Kittenberger-Gasse 95, 1230 Vienna,
Phone: +31-20-5877200
Austria
Fax: +31-20-5877260
Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +43-1-86338-400
KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited
Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road, KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB
Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,
Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden
United Kingdom
Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Phone: +44-118-931-1500
Fax: +46-8-546-550-10
Fax: +44-118-931-1108
KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A. KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf
Postboks 150 Oppsal, 0619 Oslo,
Via Verdi, 89/91 20063 Cernusco s/N.(MI),
Norway
Italy
Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Phone: +39-02-921791
Fax: +47-22-62-72-00
Fax: +39-02-92179-600
KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V. KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S
Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,
Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,
Denmark
Belgium
Phone: +45-70223880
Phone: +32-2-7209270
Fax: +45-45765850
Fax: +32-2-7208748
KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S. KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.
Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Espace Technologique de St Aubin
Portugal
Route de I’Orme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,
Phone: +351-21-843-6780
France
Fax: +351-21-849-3312
Phone: +33-1-69852600
Fax: +33-1-69853409
KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A. South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2, KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,
28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain 90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa.
Phone: +34-91-6318392 Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Fax: +34-91-6318219 Fax: +27-11-466-3050
KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC

Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki, Botanichesky pereulok 5, Moscow, 129090,
Finland Russia
Phone: +358-9-47805200 Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Fax: +358-9-47805390 Fax: +7(495)741-0018
KYOCERA Document Solutions KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East

Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,
Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,
Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich,
United Arab Emirates
Switzerland
Phone: +971-04-433-0412
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950
KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku
Osaka 540-8585, Japan
Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
© 2014 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

Service Manual: Published in May 2014 3P2SM062 Rev.2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: Published in May 2014 3P2SM062 Rev.2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DP-772

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE

IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

Always ground the copier.

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................

1-3 Maintenance Mode

1-5 Assembly and Disassembly

1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement

2-1 Mechanical Construction

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-3 Operation of the PWBs

NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.

1-1-2 Parts names

1. Original tray 4. Original stopper

1-1-3 Machine cross section

Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section

1. Original feed section

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-2-1 Installation environment

Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.)

Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking

(2) Remove the tapes and pad

2. Open the DP top cover and original DP top cover

Original width guide

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-3-1 Maintenance mode

(1) Executing a maintenance item

Enter “10871087” using

Enter the maintenance item

Press the start key.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the stop key.

Yes Repeat the same

(2) Maintenance mode item list

(3) Contents of maintenance mode items

3. Press the start key. A list is output.

Item No. Description

8. Press the start key.

Item No. Description

(8) Paper Jam Log (12) Counter Log

Detail of event log

Item No. Description

(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)

(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)

Item No. Description

Item No. Description

(10) Maintenance # Count. Item

First byte (Replacing item)

(11) Unknown # Count. Item

Item No. Description

Item No. Description

Service Status Page

Controller Information (30) FAX Information Slot1/Slot2

Item No. Description

Service Status Page

Firmware version 2LC_2000.000.000 2010.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Engine Information Send Information

1/2 (46) (47)

Item No. Description